advertisement
▼
Scroll to page 2
of 190
ENGLISH GW550 ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ELECTRONICS INC. www.lgmobile.com P/N : MMBB0359220 (1.0) GW550 ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﺮﺑﻲ ENGLISH ﻋﺮﺑﻲ GW550 User Guide www.lgmobile.com P/N : MMBB0359220 (1.0) Bluetooth QD ID B015930 GW550 User Guide This document is the user guide for the LG GW550 Windows Mobile Smartphone. All rights for this document are reserved by LG Electronics. Copying, modifying and distributing this document without the consent of LG Electronics are prohibited. Contents Introduction ..............................6 GW550 Features .......................7 Phone Components ................................ 7 Keys and Parts Functions ....................... 8 Getting Started .......................10 Installing the SIM card and Battery ........10 Battery ................................................10 SIM Card.............................................11 Charging the Battery ............................12 microSD Card ......................................13 Turn the Device On and Off ....................15 Lock the Keyboard .................................15 Getting Started.......................................15 Adjust Volume ........................................15 Screen Information .................16 The Today Screen ..................................16 Status Indicators ....................................17 Shortcut Menu .......................................18 Start Menu.............................................19 Entering Information ...............23 Using the Keyboard ................................23 QWERTY Keyboard...............................23 XT9 Mode ..............................................24 Numeric Keypad ..................................24 Recording a Note ...................................24 Contacts .................................25 2 Contacts ................................................25 Outlook Contact ...................................25 SIM Contact ........................................25 To Create a Contact ...............................25 To Find a Contact ...................................25 To Work with the Contact List .................26 To Change Contact Information ..............26 To Delete a Contact ................................26 To Copy Contacts ...................................26 Smart Contacts ......................................26 Call .........................................27 Making a Voice Call................................27 Make a Call from Phone .......................27 Make a Call from Contacts ...................27 Make a Call from Call History ...............27 Speed Dial ..........................................27 Receiving a Call .....................................28 To Answer or Reject a Call ....................28 To End a Call .......................................28 In-call Options .......................................28 To Put a Call on Hold............................28 To Set Up a Conference Call .................28 To Turn the Speakerphone On or Off .....29 To Mute a Call .....................................29 Video Calls .............................................29 Make a Video Call ................................29 To End a Video Call ..............................30 Notes ..................................................30 Using Call History...................................30 Find Contact........................................30 Send Text Message ..............................30 Contents E-mail .................................................30 View Timers ........................................30 Delete .................................................30 Delete List ...........................................31 Filter ...................................................31 Video Call............................................31 Messaging ..............................32 Messaging .............................................32 Text Message ........................................32 To create an SMS message ..................32 To create an MMS message .................33 To reply or forward a text message .......33 E-mail....................................................33 To Set up an E-mail Accont ..................34 To create and send a new e-mail ..........35 To reply or forward an e-mail................35 Receiving Messages ..............................36 Managing Messages ..............................36 My e-mail ..............................................37 Smart Email ...........................................37 Multimedia .............................38 Camera..................................................38 Taking a Photo.....................................38 Recording a Video................................38 Camera Settings ..................................39 Capture Mode Settings ........................40 Pictures & Videos ...................................41 To Copy a Picture or Video Clip to Your Device ................................................41 To View Pictures ..................................41 To View Slide Show .............................. 42 To Play Videos with Audio .....................42 To Delete a Picture or Video Clip ...........42 To Edit a Picture ..................................42 To Set a Picture as the Today Screen Background.........................................43 To Send Pictures and Video Clips via E-mail or MMS ....................................44 To Assign Pictures to Contacts ..............44 To Save a Picture as Another File ..........44 To Use Advance Options .......................45 Windows Media .....................................45 Playback Screen ..................................46 Now Playing Screen .............................47 Library Screen .....................................47 FM Radio ...............................................48 To Use Radio Options ...........................49 Applications ............................50 Internet Explorer ....................................50 Windows Live™ ....................................51 To Set Up Windows Live™ ...................51 Using Hotmail ......................................51 Windows Live™ Contacts ....................52 Using Windows Live™ Search..............52 ActiveSync .............................................52 Setting up Windows Vista™ .................53 Setting up Windows XP ........................54 Synchronizing Information ....................55 Synchronizing via Bluetooth ..................57 3 Contents Synchronizing Musics, Videos, and Pictures ..............................................58 Internet Sharing .....................................59 Bluetooth Manager ................................59 To Set the Bluetooth Configuration ........59 To Make Your Device Discoverable ........60 Bluetooth Partnership ..........................60 To Accept a Bluetooth Partnership ........61 Services ..............................................61 Settings Page ......................................62 Accessories Page ................................62 My Devices Page .................................62 Office Mobile .........................................63 Excel Mobile ..........................................63 OneNote Mobile .....................................65 PowerPoint Mobile .................................65 Word Mobile ..........................................66 Adobe Reader LE ...................................68 To open a PDF file................................68 Task Manager ........................................68 MSN Money ...........................................68 MSN Weather.........................................68 GPS Accelerator .....................................69 AGPS Setting .........................................69 Java ......................................................69 Marketplace...........................................69 Microsoft My Phone ...............................70 To Configure My Phone ........................70 Remote Desktop ....................................70 RSS Viewer ............................................70 4 To Subscribe to RSS Feeds...................70 To Update RSS Feeds...........................71 To View RSS Feeds ..............................71 Live Search Widget ................................71 File Explorer...........................................71 Voice Notes............................................72 Calendar ................................................72 To Add an Event to your Calendar .........72 To Change your Default Calendar View ..73 Tasks .....................................................73 To Create a Task ..................................73 To Change the Priority of a Task ............73 To Set a Default reminder for all New Tasks ..................................................73 To Show Start and Due Dates in the Task List .............................................74 To Locate a Task ..................................74 Calculator ..............................................74 StopWatch .............................................74 Games ...................................................75 XT9 Dictionaries ....................................75 To add a word in XT9 ...........................75 To edit a word in XT9 ...........................75 To delete a word in XT9........................75 To add auto-substitution shortcut..........76 To edit auto-substitution shortcut ..........76 To delete auto-substitution shortcut ......76 XT9 Settings ..........................................76 Smart Applicatin ....................................76 Contents Settings ..................................77 Phone ....................................................77 Auto Answer........................................77 Band Switch ........................................77 Call Barring .........................................77 Call Forwarding ...................................77 Call Options.........................................77 Call Waiting .........................................78 Caller ID ..............................................78 Channels.............................................78 Fixed Dialing .......................................78 Networks ............................................78 Pre-Defined Text Messages ..................78 Ringer Output ......................................78 Sounds ..................................................78 Profiles ..................................................79 Home Screen .........................................79 To Select Information Shown On Screen 79 To select color for your screen ..............80 To Add Own Background Image ............80 To Set Screen Timeout .........................80 Clock & Alarm ........................................81 Date and Time .....................................81 Alarm..................................................81 Connections...........................................81 Wireless Manager................................81 Wi-Fi ..................................................81 Configuring Wi-Fi Connection Settingsi..82 To check WLAN statusi.........................82 Bluetooth ............................................83 Phone .................................................83 Security .................................................83 Device Lock ........................................83 To Protect your Phone with a PIN ..........84 To Change your Password ....................84 To Enter Owner Information ..................84 Remove Programs .................................84 Power Management ...............................84 Accessibility...........................................84 Regional Settings ...................................85 Setup E-mail .......................................85 Managed Programs .............................85 Accessories ............................86 Package Contents ..................................86 Guidelines for safe and efficient use ............................88 Trouble shooting .....................94 5 Introduction Congratulations on your purchase of this LG GW550 Windows Mobile Smartphone. This user guide contains information on the use and operation of this phone. Please read all the information carefully for optimal performance and to prevent damage or misuse of the phone. Any changes or modifications not expressly approved in this user guide could void your warranty for this equipment. 6 GW550 Features Phone Components 1. Phone button 12. Earpiece 2. Proximity Sensor 13. Camera 3. Display screen 4. Home key 14. Navigation key 15. Right soft key 16. End key 17. Back key 5. Left soft key 6. Call key 7. Enter key 18. Enter key 19. Smart E-mail key 20. Smart Contacts key 21. Smart Applications key 8. Messaging key 9. Microphone 22. Camera 10. Speakers 23. Battery Compartment SD OPEN micro LOCK 11. microSD Card Holder 24. SIM Card Holder 7 GW550 Features Keys and Parts Functions 1. Phone button bLong press to turn the phone on or off. bShort press to display Quick List. Quick List allows you to turn off or lock the keyboard of your device, provides shortcut access to Task Manager or Wireless Manager, or allows you to change profiles. 2. Proximity Sensor 3. Display screen 4. Home key: Press to return to the Today screen. 5. Left soft key: Press to perform the function indicated by the text on the display above it. 6. Send key: Press to place or answer incoming calls. In standby mode, press to access the dialer and view the most recent incoming, outgoing and missed calls. 7. Enter key: Press to confirm a selection. 8. Messaging key: Press to access Messaging. 9. Microphone 10. Speakers 11. microSD Card Holder 12. Earpiece 13. Camera: Use for video calls. 8 14. Navigation key: Use as directional keys to move up, down, left, or right. 15. Right soft key: Press to perform the function indicated by the text on the display above it. 16. End key: Press to end or reject a call. 17. Back key: Press to go back to the previous screen or back out of menus one level at a time. When entering text, press to delete single characters; press and hold to delete entire words. 18. Enter key 19. Smart E-mail key: Press to access Smart E-mail. Smart E-mail is a shortcut application to send and receive e-mails. 20. Smart Contacts key: Press to access Smart Contacts. Smart Contacts allows you to add your favorite contacts or phone numbers to the Smart Contacts list. 21. Smart Applications key: Press to access Smart Applications. Smart Application allows you to add your favorite applications to the Smart Applications list for easy access. 22. Camera: Use to take photos or videos. 23. Battery Compartment 24. SIM Card Holder GW550 Features Volume Keys bWhen the screen is idle, press to adjust system volume. bDuring a call, press to adjust the in-call volume. USB Connector Use to connect the charger, earphone, or USB cable to synchronize with a computer. Camera Key Press to activate the camera and take photos or videos. How to hold your phone In order to allow better RF antenna sensitivity, LG suggests that you hold the handset as depicted in the figure below. Please do not cover the RF antenna area with your hand during a call and using a bluetooth connection. It may degrade speech quality. 9 Getting Started Installing the SIM card and Battery Always turn off your phone and disconnect it from the charger and other accessories before installing or replacing the SIM card, microSD card, and battery. To remove the back cover 1. Place three fingers on the back cover and your thumb on the front panel. 2. Push the front panel with your thumb and slide the back cover off with the three fingers. Battery Your phone comes with a rechargeable Li-ion battery. To remove the battery 1. Turn the phone off. 2. Remove the back cover. 3. Insert your finger in the battery’s finger grip, then gently push down the battery towards the direction of the arrow to release and remove the battery. B A 10 Getting Started SIM Card Your SIM card contains your phone number, subscription details, and contacts and must be inserted into your handset. To install the SIM card Insert the SIM card with the metal contacts facing down and the cut-off corner on the top-right side. To remove the SIM card Note The SIM card and its contacts can be easily damaged by scratching and bending the card. Be careful when installing and removing the card. Refer to the instructions supplied with the SIM card. To install the battery 1. Remove the back cover. 2. Insert the battery. Align the contacts of the battery with the corresponding connectors on the battery compartment and insert in the direction of the arrow (A) then push the battery into place (B). 3. Replace the back cover. A B 1. Remove the battery if it is installed. 2. Slide the SIM card out the slot. 11 Getting Started To replace the back cover 1. Align the back cover (A). 2. Push the back cover to lock into place (B). B A Charging the Battery 1. Make sure the battery is installed inside the battery compartment. 2. Plug the power adaptor into a wall outlet. 3. Flip open the USB connector’s cover of the phone. 4. Connect the power adaptor into the USB connector of your phone. 12 Battery Indicators When the phone is turned on... icon indicates that the battery bThe is charging. bWhen the battery is fully charged, the icon is displayed. When the phone is turned off... bA charging animation is displayed on the screen. bWhen the battery is fully charged, the animation stops and the screen turns blank. Note When you charge a fully discharged battery, it may take over a minute for the display to respond. It is not a malfunction but completely normal. Getting Started CAUTION! bDo not remove the battery or the SIM card while charging. bThere is a risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Replace only with batteries approved by the manufacturer. bDispose of used batteries according to the local regulations in your area. bDo not force the mini USB connector as this may damage the phone or the cable. microSD Card For additional storage space for your photos, videos, music and files, install a microSD card into your phone. To install the microSD card 1. Push the microSD card slot towards the direction of the arrow (A) to release lock, then flip up the slot (B). 2. Slide the microSD card into the slot with the gold contact area facing up (C). 3. Flip down (D) then push the slot towards the direction of the arrow (E) to lock. WARNING! • Unplug the charger from the mains and phone during lightning storms to avoid electric shock or fire. • Make sure that no sharp-edged items, such as nails, come into contact with the battery. There is a risk of causing fire. 13 Getting Started B A To remove the microSD card 1. Turn the phone off. 2. Push the microSD card slot to release lock. 3. Flip up the slot. 4. Slide out the microSD card from the slot. 5. Flip down then push the slot to lock. Info! C D OP LO OP LO 14 CK EN CK EN E The microSD card is an optional accessory and is not included in your package. Contact your retailer to purchase one. bAvoid using the microSD card when the battery is low. bThe card is designed to fit easily into the slot. bDo not bend the card or force it into the slot. bDo not insert any memory cards other than microSD. Getting Started Turn the Device On and Off Adjust Volume To turn on the device, press and hold the Power button located on top of the device. To turn off the device: • Press the Power button and select Power off. • Press and hold the Power button. Your device has two types of volume: bSystem Volume: Adjust the system volume to change the volume level of system sounds and notifications like alarm, ringer, keypad, audio and video playback. Lock the Keyboard To lock the keyboard, press and hold the End key. To unlock keyboard, select Unlock, then press *. Getting Started Getting Started gives you step-by-step instructions on how to set up the basic functions of your device. From the Today screen, do either of the following to access Getting Started: bScroll down to select the Getting Started shortcut menu, then scroll left or right and select a specific topic. bSelect Start > All Programs > Getting Started, then select the topic to view. To adjust the system volume: • When the device is in idle mode, press the volume keys up or down to increase or decrease volume. bIn-Call Volume: Adjusts the volume level of the phone conversation. To adjust the in-call volume: • During a call, press the volume keys up or down to increase or decrease volume. 15 Screen Information The Today Screen From the home screen, you can quickly check your schedule, and see at a glance any missed calls or new messages. Default Today Screen Status Indicators Service Provider’s Name Date and Time Wi-Fi Status Shortcut menu Scroll down to view more shortcut menu. Highlight a menu to expand to more shortcuts. Contacts Start menu (Left soft key function) (Right soft key function) bPress the left soft key bPress the right soft key to access menu. to access Contacts. To Customize the Today Screen You can change the layout, background image, color scheme and the time out of the Today screen. bTo customize settings of the Today screen, go to Start > Settings > Home Screen. 16 Screen Information Status Indicators The following are some of the status icons that you may see on your device. Icon GPRS network in use HSDPA network in use Description Indicates maximum signal strength New message received Missed call or rejected call Searching for signal No phone service Call in progress Indicates battery level Call on hold Battery low Bluetooth active Battery charging Wireless network available Silent mode enabled Wireless network connecting Vibrate mode enabled Wireless network connected WCDMA (3G) available HSDPA available GPRS (General Packet Radio Services) available 3G network in use 17 Screen Information Shortcut Menu The shortcut menu displays notifications or other information of each menu item. By default the following applications are displayed: Menu Description Calls and Messages Notification Displays notifications about recent voice and video calls, voicemail, and other messages. To access a submenu, use the navigation keys to scroll, then press the Enter key. Appointments Displays upcoming schedules and allows you to set appointments. Getting Started Select an item to view its help information. Favorites Displays and allows you to add your favorite web pages for easy access. Settings Displays and allows you to easily adjust basic device settings. bTo access a shortcut menu, use the navigation keys, then press the Enter key. bTo add shortcuts of media applications, go to Start > Settings > Home Screen> Home Screen Layout > Sliding Panel Media. 18 Screen Information Start Menu The Start menu contains all the programs installed on your device. bTo access a menu, use the navigation keys to highlight the item, then press the Enter key. Accessing the Start menu bFrom the Home screen, press the left soft key Start to access the Start menu. bBy default, the Recent Programs screen is displayed. To view other programs, press the left soft key All Programs. bTo go to the next screen display, press the left soft key More. bTo go back to the previous screen, press the Back key . Programs The following programs are installed on your device. Icon Program Description Office Mobile Excel Mobile View and edit Excel workbooks. Word Mobile View and edit Word documents. PowerPoint Mobile View slide shows. OneNote Mobile Create notes with pictures and recordings. 19 Screen Information Icon 20 Program Description Messaging Send and receive e-mail and text messages. Calendar Schedule appointments and set alarm notifications. Contacts Lets you store names, phone numbers, e-mail and other information. Internet Explorer Browse the web and download files from the Internet. Tasks Keeps track of your tasks. ActiveSync Synchronizes information between your device and a computer. Call History Displays the list of missed, received or placed calls. Games Play pre-installed games on your device: Bubble Breaker and Solitaire. Voice Notes Record voice notes. Pictures & Videos Collects, organizes, and sorts photo files in the My Picture folder of your device or the storage card. Getting Started Learn the basics on how to operate your device. Internet Sharing Use your device as an Internet sharing device. File Explorer Browse files and folders saved on your device or the storage card. Marketplace Purchase and download applications on the web. Screen Information Icon Program Description Microsoft My Phone Synchronizes information on your device with your My Phone account at http://myphone.microsoft.com. Adobe Reader LE View *.pdf files on your device. AGPS Settings Enable Assisted Global Positioning System. Brightness Control the level of brightness when using the battery or external power. Bluetooth Connect with other Bluetooth devices and create a network. Camera Capture photos and record videos. FM Radio Connect the earphones and tune in to the FM radio. GPS Accelerator Download GPS data. Java Install Java applications on your device. Remote Desktop Set up and connect to your computer to access files and programs from your device. Windows Media Mobile version of Windows Media Player. Tune in and watch your favorite music videos. RSS Viewer View RSS or RDF-compatible newsfeeds. Stopwatch Functions as a timer. Windows Live Mobile version of Windows Live™. 21 Screen Information Icon 22 Program Description Clock & Alarm Allows you to set the date and time and set alarms. MSN Money Access MSN Money to view stocks. MSN Weather View the weather forecast via MSN Weather. Search Widget Provides access to Live Search. Speed Dial Allows you to add phone numbers for speed dial. XT9 Dictionaries Allows you to set the language of the dictionary and enable functions such as word completion, next word prediction and others. Entering Information Using the Keyboard QWERTY Keyboard bTo enter a single symbol or number printed at the top of keys, press Fn then press the corresponding key. To enter various symbols or numbers, press and hold Fn then press the corresponding keys. To switch back to text mode, press Fn again. To enter the symbols that are not shown on the keypad, press then select the desired symbol. bPress to go to the next line. bPress to erase a character. Sym Numeric Keypad DEL Your device comes with a full keyboard for text entry and other shortcut button functions. The following icons are displayed on the status indicator area: Icon QWERTY Keyboard QWERTY keyboard is activated whenever an alphanumeric text entry is required. This functions just like a standard computer keyboard. bTo switch between the different letter cases, press . To type all in upper case letters, press and hold then press the corresponding keys. To switch back to lower case entry, press again. CAPS Description Enter text in lower case letter Enter one character in upper case and the rest in lower case Enter all text in upper case letter Enter a number or symbol Enter all numbers or symbols CAPS CAPS 23 Entering Information XT9 Mode Numeric Keypad XT9 predicts words and suggests spellings as you type the first few characters, so you can just select the word you want. To activate XT9 mode, press Fn + spacebar and select XT9 English. To enter text using XT9 1. Type the first few characters of the word. 2. As you type, the dictionary displays predicted words below the word you are typing. 3. Scroll left or right to highlight the word then press the Enter key to select. The numeric keypad functions just like a standard phone keypad. It is automatically activated whenever numeric entries are required, such as in setting the time. The following icons are displayed on the status indicator area: Icon Description Enter the first character in upper case and the rest in lower case Enter text in lower case letter 24 Recording a Note You can create a stand-alone recording (voice note) or you can add a recording to a note. To create a voice note 1. Select Start > Voice Notes. 2. Hold your device’s microphone near your mouth or other sound sources. 3. Select Record to start recording. 4. Select Stop to stop recording. To add a recording to a note 1. Select Start > Office Mobile > OneNote Mobile. 2. Create or open a note. 3. Select Menu > Insert Recording. 4. Hold your device’s microphone near your mouth or other sound sources. 5. Select Record to start recording. 6. Select Stop to stop recording. Contacts Contacts Contacts is your address book and information storage for the people you communicate with. You can store phone numbers, e-mail addresses, home addresses, and other information that relates to a contact. You can also add a picture or assign a ringtone to a contact. Your device supports two types of contacts: Outlook and SIM Contacts. Outlook Contact Contacts are stored in the device memory. If you use Outlook on your PC, you can synchronize contacts between your device and the PC. SIM Contact Contacts are stored in the SIM card memory. You can only store a name and a phone number per entry. To Create a Contact 1. From the Today screen, select Contacts. 2. Select New. 3. Select Outlook Contact or SIM Contact, then enter the contact details. 4. When finished, select Done. TIP! bYou can create a contact from Call History list, select Menu > Save to Contacts. bTo add the sender of a message to Contacts, select the received message and the number, then press the Enter key. To Find a Contact There are several ways to find a contact when your contact list is long. 1. From the Today screen, select Contacts. 2. If you are not in Name view, tap Menu > View By > Name. 3. Do one of the following: bEnter the first character of a name. Scroll down to select the desired name from the the list. The next character you enter continues to narrow the search. bFilter the list by category. In the contact list, select Menu > Filter. Then, select a category you’ve assigned to a contact. To show all contacts again, select No Categories. 25 Contacts To Work with the Contact List To Delete a Contact There are several ways to use and synchronise the contact list. Here are a few tips: 1. From the Today screen, select Contacts. 2. In the contact list, do any of the following: bIn Name view, you can search for a contact by entering a name or by using the alphabetical index. To switch to Name view, select Menu > View By > Name. bTo see a summary of information about a contact, select the contact. From there you can also make a call or send a message. bTo see a list of contacts employed by a specific company, select Menu > View By > Company. Then, select the company name. 1. From the Today screen, select Contacts. 2. Select the contact. 3. Select Menu > Delete. 4. Select Yes to confirm delete. To Change Contact Information 1. From the Today screen, select Contacts. 2. Select the contact. 3. Select Menu > Edit and enter the changes. 4. When finished, select Done. 26 To Copy Contacts To copy saved Contacts from SIM card to your device or from your device to SIM card: 1. From the Today screen, select Contacts. 2. Select Menu > Select Contacts > Several or All. 3. Select Menu > Copy Contacts > To Contacts or To SIM. Smart Contacts You can register the contact you frequently use in Smart Contacts. Using the registered contact, you can easily make a call or send a message. Call Making a Voice Call Calling is easy with the smart dial feature. If you press a number on the keypad, the screen displays the phone numbers in your Call History, starting with the number you enter. You can then select the number you want to call. Make a Call from Phone To make a call, enter the phone number you wish to call, including the area code, and press the Call key . For international calls, press and hold “0” to add the + character that replaces the international access code. To end the call, press the End key . Note If you enter the wrong number, press to delete a number. To delete all the numbers, press and hold . Make a Call from Contacts 1. From the Today screen, select Contacts. 2. Select the desired contact. 3. Press the Call key to place the call. Make a Call from Call History 1. From the Today screen, press the Call key to view your call history. 2. Select the desired number or name from the list. 3. Press the Call key to place the call. Speed Dial Use speed dial to call a number by pressing and holding a number key when in the home screen. Before you can create a speed dial entry, the number must already exists in Contacts list. 27 Call To Create a Speed Dial Entry Receiving a Call 1. From the Today screen, select Contacts. 2. Highlight the contact, then press the Enter key. 3. Select Menu > Add to Speed Dial. 4. In the Keypad Assignment box, select the desired number. 5. Select Done to save. When you receive an incoming call, a message will appear and the device will ring if the ring volume is turned on. Note bKey 1 is generally assigned to your voice mail, and Speed Dial will designate the next available key by default. If you want to save a number to a key that has already been assigned, the new number will replace the current one. bTo delete a Speed Dial entry, in the Speed Dial list, select the desired entry then select Menu > Delete. To Answer or Reject a Call bTo answer the call, select Answer or . press the Call key bTo reject the call, press the End key . bTo reject the call and send a text message, select Menu > Respond with text message. To End a Call bTo end an incoming or outgoing call, press the End key . In-call Options To Put a Call on Hold bSelect Menu > Hold. bTo unhold a call, select Menu > Unhold. To Set Up a Conference Call 1. Either put the current call on hold, and dial a second number; or accept an incoming call when you are already having a call conversation. 2. Select Menu > Conference. 28 Call Note Not all service providers support conference call. Contact your service provider for details. To Turn the Speakerphone On or Off The speakerphone allows users to talk hands-free or allows other people to listen to the conversation. bDuring a conversation, select Menu > Speakerphone On. The speakerphone icon appear on the status indicators area. bTo turn off the speakerphone, select Menu > Speakerphone Off. bDuring a conversation, select Menu > Mute. The microphone off icon appears on the screen. bTo turn on the microphone, select Unmute. Video Calls You can see a real-time, two-way video between you and the caller who has a compatible mobile phone. Note A 3G network coverage is required to enabled Video Call functions. You can send or start to receive video from a caller whose phone has Video Call capabilities. Contact your service provider for details. WARNING! To avoid damage to your ear, do not hold out your device when the speakerphone is turned Off. To Mute a Call You can turn off the microphone during a call. When the phone is muted, you can hear the caller but the caller cannot hear you Make a Video Call To Make a Video Call From Phone 1. Enter the phone number or select the name from Contacts or Call History. 2. Select Menu > Make VT Call or Menu > Video Call from Contacts to place the call. 29 Call To End a Video Call bTo end an incoming or outgoing video call, . press the End key Notes 1. Video call service is only available in 3G coverage areas. 2. The video call will be terminated in the following cases: When you accept a 3rd party, Conference Call, or a 2nd incoming call. When the voice call is placed on hold. When the voice call is disconnected. When moving out of a 3G service area. When the network connection is in poor state. Using Call History From the Today screen, do either of the following to open the Call History screen: bHighlight Calls and Messages Notification shortcut, then select View. bSelect Start > Call History. You can view the recently missed, received, and dialed calls. You can make a call, send a text or multimedia message, and save a number to Contacts. 30 You can delete a selected number or select and delete all at one time. Find Contact If the number is saved in your Contacts, you can view the contact details by selecting Menu > Find Contact. Send Text Message 1. Select the number you want from the list. 2. Select Menu > Send Text Message to send a text message. E-mail If the selected number has an e-mail address saved in your Contacts, you can send an email by selecting Menu > E-mail. View Timers To view the approximate duration of all calls made on your device, select Menu > View Timers. bTo reset timer, select Menu > Reset Timers. Delete 1. Select the desired number. 2. Select Menu > Delete. 3. Select Yes to confirm. Call Delete List To empty the call history list, select Menu > Delete List. Filter bNo Filter: Allows you to view missed, received, and dialed call records. bMissed Calls: Allows you to view the calls which you have not answered. bIncoming Calls: Allows you to view the calls that you have answered. bOutgoing Calls: Allows you to view the calls that you have dialed. Video Call 1. Select the number to make a video call from the list. 2. Select Menu > Video Call. 31 Messaging Messaging To Open the Messaging screen bFrom the Today screen, select Start > Messaging. You can send and receive text messages, multimedia messages, audio messages, and email messagse. To create an SMS message 1. From the Messaging screen, select Text Message. 2. Select Menu > New > SMS. 3. On the To field, enter the recipient’s phone number or add a recipient from Contacts. TIP! Text Message You can write, edit, and view the text messages. bTo add a recipient from Contacts, select Menu > Add Recipient. Then select the name. bRepeat the same procedure to add more recipients. 4. Compose your message. TIP! bTo use a template, select Menu > My Text, the text and Insert. 5. When finished, select Send. 32 Messaging To create an MMS message To reply or forward a text message 1. From the Messaging screen, select Text Message. 2. Select Menu > New > MMS. 3. On the To field, enter the recipient’s phone number. 4. Enter the Subject for the message. 5. Select Insert Text to enter the text of the message, and select Insert Picture/ Video or Insert Audio to add media objects. To capture a new image or record a new sound clip for the message, select Menu > Capture. 6. To preview a multimedia message before sending it, select Menu > Preview Message. 7. When finished, select Send. Highlight the message then select Reply or Menu > Reply/Forward > Reply, Reply all or Forward. E-mail You can send and receive Outlook and Internet e-mail trhough an Internet Service Provider (ISP). You can access e-mail from work using VPN connection. Your device can send and receive e-mails just as you do with a PC. You can set up the following e-mail accounts: Outlook E-mail This e-mail account can be synchronized with your computer through Microsoft Outlook® or Exchange Server®. Internet E-mail This is an e-mail account provided by an Internet Service Provider (ISP) or a web-based e-mail such as Hotmail, Yahoo!Mail, etc. 33 Messaging To Set up an E-mail Accont 1. From the Today screen, select Start > Messaging. 2. Select Setup E-mail. 3. Enter your E-mail address and Password then select Next. Note Select the Save Password box to allow the phone to remember your password so you do not have to enter it again. 4. Auto setup attempts to download necessary e-mail server settings so that you do not have to set them manually. Once finished, select Next. 5. Enter Your Name (name to display when you send e-mail), Account display name (name for this account on your device), then select Next. 34 Note bAuto setup is successful, the Account display name and the address of the incoming and outgoing e-mail servers are populated. bAuto setup is unsuccessful or you have an account that you access using VPN server connection, contact your ISP or network administrator for the required information. 6. Select Automatic Send/Receive option. 7. Select Finish to complete setup. Messaging To create and send a new e-mail 1. From the Messaging screen, select the e-mail account. 2. Select Menu > New. 3. On To, enter the recipient’s e-mail address. TIP! bTo add Bcc and Cc recipients, use the navigation key up to view and scroll the screen’s the top page. 4. Enter the Subject. 5. Compose your message. 6. When finished, select Send. Note bYou will be alerted when you have received messages. bReceived messages are stored in the Inbox. bIf the device shows “No space for SIM message”, delete some messages from the Inbox. bIf the device shows “No space for messages”, make space of each repository by deleting messages, media, and applications. To reply or forward an e-mail 1. Highlight the message then select Menu > Reply/Forward > Reply, Reply all or Forward. 2. Compose your response. bTo quickly add common messages, select Menu > My Text and select a desired message. bTo add an attachment, select Menu > Insert > Picture, Voice Note or File. 3. When finished, select Send. 35 Messaging Receiving Messages The manner in which you receive messages depends on the type of the account you have: • To send and receive e-mail for an Outlook E-mail account, begin synchronization with Exchange Server through ActiveSync. • To send and receive an Internet e-mail account, download messages through a remote e-mail server. • Text messages are automatically received when your phone is turned on. When your phone is off, your service provider holds the messages until the next time your phone is turned on. Managing Messages On the Messaging screen, select the message account to open. By default, when you open the account, its Inbox is displayed. To view and manage account folders, select Menu > Folders. bDeleted Items: View deleted items. bDrafts: View saved messages. Select a message to edit message. bInbox: View received messages. Select a message to view message. 36 TIP! Windows Mobile 6.5 Standard manages your Inbox messages by address. You can check the conversation history with the address that you sent a message to or view the message by selecting the threaded message. Create a new message on the text message composer which is on the bottom of the conversation history screen. You can send the new message by selecting Send. bOutbox: The outbox is a temporary storage for messages waiting to be sent. Failed messages are also placed in the Outbox. bSent Items: View the messages you sent. Messaging My e-mail My e-mail connects you to your online world while on the go with your phone. Once you choose “Setup Now”, My e-mail will prompt you for your username and password to your favorite Internet destinations. You have the option to choose one or more sites either now or in the future, and My e-mail will automatically deliver new information form those sites to your phone. Smart Email You can add the email address you frequently use in Smart Email. Using this menu,you can easily view the email which is delivered from registerd Email address. 37 Multimedia Camera Taking a Photo 1. Select Start > Camera or press the Camera key to activate the camera capture mode. Zoom White Balance Photo Mode Remaining shots Memory Resolution bTo send the image via MMS or e-mail, select Menu > Send. bTo delete the image, select Menu > Delete. 3. The captured image is automatically saved in the My Pictures folder. To view images in the folder, select Start > Pictures & Videos. 4. To close the camera, select Menu > Exit. Recording a Video 1. Select Start > Camera or press the Camera key to activate the camera capture mode. 2. Select Options > Video. 3. Press the Enter key or the Camera key to start recording; press again to stop recording. 2. Press the Enter key or the Camera key to capture an image. 3. The captured image is displayed on the screen. Do either of the following: bTo capture more images, select Back. bTo view the images in the folder, select Menu > View. 38 Multimedia 4. Do either of the following: bTo capture more images, select Back. bTo play the video, select Menu > Play. bTo send the video via MMS, select Menu > Send. bTo delete the video, select Menu > Delete. 3. The recorded video is automatically saved in the My Videos folder. To play videos in the folder, select Start > File Explorer > My Videos, then select the desired video file to play. Videos are played using the Windows Media Player application. 4. To close the camera, select Menu > Exit. Camera Settings Before taking a photo or recording video, you can change the camera settings by selecting Menu > Settings. Available settings are as follows: bTimer: Allows you to select the delay time (5 sec., 10 sec.) bBurst: Set the number of shots to take when burst mode is enabled. (3 pics, 5 pics) bStorage: Select the memory to save your pictures and videos. bShutter Sound: Enable or disable shutter sound when the Camera or Enter key is pressd. bVideo Format: Allows you to select the video file format. bVideo Voice: Enable or disable audio during video recording. bFlicker: Allows you to select flicker setting. (50Hz, 60Hz) bTime Stamp: Enable or disable time stamp on captured images. bPhoto Quality: Allows you to select the photo quality. (Normal, Fine, Super Fine) bPanorama: Allows you to select the panoramic view. (Horzontal, Vertical) 39 Multimedia Capture Mode Settings On the capture screen, select Options to view and adjust capture mode settings. Choosing Capture Mode Type Use the navigation up and down keys then Enter key to select a capture mode type: bPhoto: Select to capture still images. This is the default capture mode. bTimer: Select to enable timer mode. bBurst: Select to capture three or five continuous shots. bFrame: Select to choose from the predefined frames and add it to your images. bPMK: Select to capture image in vivid colors. bSmile: When capturing an image in this mode, the focus is set on the smiling subject. bVideo: Select to record a standard video. bMMS Video: Select to capture video suitable to send via MMS. 40 Use the navigation left and right keys then Enter to adjust other capture settings such as: bBrightness: Adjusts brightness. bWhite Balance: Auto / Incandescent / Fluorescent / Daylight / Cloudy bEffect: Normal / Black & White / Negative / Sepia bResolution: Available options depend on the selected capture mode type. Multimedia Pictures & Videos The Pictures & Videos application collects, organizes, and sorts images and video clips on your device or the storage card. You can view the pictures as a slide show, beam or send them via e-mail, edit them, or set them as the background on the Today screen. To Copy a Picture or Video Clip to Your Device You can copy pictures from your PC and view them on your device. bCopy the pictures from your PC or a storage card to the My Pictures folder on your device. Note bYou can also copy pictures to your PC from your device using a memory card. Insert the memory card into the memory card slot on your device, then copy the pictures from your device to the folder you created on the memory card. To View Pictures 1. From the Today screen, select Start > Pictures & Videos. The images in the My Pictures folder appear as thumbnails by default. TIP! bIf you are not in the My Pictures folder, select Menu > Folders > My Pictures. bTo go to other folders, select Menu > Folders > My Device, then select your desired folder. 2. Highlight a picture and select View. 3. To zoom the image, select Menu > Zoom, then select zoom options (Zoom In / Zoom Out / Fit to Screen / Actual Size). 41 Multimedia To View Slide Show To Delete a Picture or Video Clip bFrom the My Pictures folder screen or while viewing a picture, select Menu > Play Slide Show. bTo stop slide show, press the back key . 1. From the Today screen, select Start > Pictures & Videos. 2. Highlight a picture or video clip then select Menu > Delete. 3. Select Yes to confirm the deletion. To Play Videos with Audio To Edit a Picture 1. Select Menu > Folders > My Device > My Documents > My Videos to open the default folder for videos. By default, the video files appear as thumbnails with a media icon. You can rotate, crop, and adjust the brightness and color contrast of your pictures. 1. From the Today screen, select Start > Pictures & Videos. 2. Select the picture you want to edit. 3. Select Menu > Edit. The Edit screen appears. 4. Select Menu, then any of the following: bRotate: To rotate the picture 90º clockwise. bCrop: To crop the picture. Use the navigation and Enter keys to select the position of the first and second corners. Select Done to complete cropping. 2. Highlight the video and select Play to play it with the built-in Windows Media Player. 42 Multimedia To Set a Picture as the Today Screen Background bAuto Correct: To adjust the brightness and contrast levels of the picture. Note bTo undo an edit, select Menu > Undo. bTo cancel all unsaved edits you made to the picture, press then select Yes to confirm. You can use a picture as the background on the Today screen. 1. From the Today screen, select Start > Pictures & Videos. 2. Select the picture you want to set as background. 3. Select Menu > Use as Home Screen. 4. Adjust the transparency level, select a higher percentage for a more transparent picture, or a lower percentage for a more opaque picture. 5. Select Finish to complete. 5. When finished, select Done. 43 Multimedia To Send Pictures and Video Clips via E-mail or MMS You can send pictures and video clips to other devices via e-mail. 1. First, set up Messaging to send and receive e-mail messages. 2. From the Today screen, select Start > Pictures & Videos. 3. Highlight the picture or video clip you want to send. 4. Select Menu > Send, then select the messaging account (such as Outlook E-mail or MMS) to send the attached item. 5. A new message is created with the item attached. 6. Enter the recipient name and subject, then select Send. The message will be sent the next time you synchronize your device. Note bPictures and video clips are saved automatically before they are sent. 44 To Assign Pictures to Contacts You can assign a picture to a contact so that you can easily identify the contact at any point of time. 1. From the Today screen, select Start > Pictures & Videos. 2. Highlight a picture then select Menu > Save to Contact. 3. Select the desired contact from the Contacts list then Select to confirm. To Save a Picture as Another File 1. From the Today screen, select Start > Pictures & Videos. 2. Select the picture you want to save as another file. 3. Select Menu > Save > Save As. 4. Enter the new filename, then select Done. Multimedia To Use Advance Options 1. From the Today screen, select Start > Pictures & Videos. 2. Select the picture for which you want to configure settings. 3. Select Menu > Options. The Options screen appears, allow you to: bResize a picture so that you can send it faster via e-mail. bConfigure the rotation setting. bConfigure the view settings during slide shows. Windows Media Use Microsoft Windows Media Player 10 Mobile for Pocket PC to play digital audio and video files that are stored on your device or on a network, such as on a web site. The following file formats are supported by this application: WAV, WMA, WMV, MP3, MIDI, SP-MIDI, SMAF, AAC, AMR, 3GP, MP4, etc. To Open Windows Media Access Windows Media by any of the following options: bFrom the Today screen, select Start > Windows Media to open the application. bOpen an audio or video file from File Explorer or Pictures & Videos. Windows Media Player has three primary screens: Playback, Now Playing and Library. From the Playback screen, select Now Playing or Menu > Library to switch to Now Playing or Library screen. 45 Multimedia Playback Screen This is the default screen that displays the playback controls, the album art window, and the video window. You can change the appearance of this screen by choosing a different skin. When you are viewing the Playback screen, the following commands appear on the Menu. bOptions: Lets you adjust various Windows Media Player options, including network, skin, and hardware button options. bProperties: Displays information about the currently playing file. bAbout: Displays information about the Windows Media Player, such as the version number. Playback Controls bLibrary: Displays the Library screen so you can choose a file to play. bPlay/Pause: Starts or pauses playback. bStop: Stops playback. bShuffle/Repeat: Plays the items in the Now Playing playlist randomly/repeatedly. bFull Screen: When a video is playing, displays it by using the entire screen. 46 During playback, use the following keys to play, pause, skip titles/tracks, and adjust the volume. bTo start or pause playback, press the Enter key. bTo go to the previous title/track, press the left navigation key. bTo go to the next title/track, press the right navigation key. bTo increase or decrease the volume, press the up or down navigation keys. Multimedia Now Playing Screen Library Screen The screen that displays the Now Playing playlist. This special playlist indicates the currently playing file and any files that are “queued up” to play next. When you are viewing the Now Playing screen, the following commands appear on the Menu. The Library screen lets you quickly find your audio files, video files, and playlists. It contains categories such as My Music, My Videos, My TV, My Playlists and Now Playing. bLibrary: Displays the Library screen so you can choose a file to play. bMove Up/ Down: Moves the selected item up/down in the playlist order. bRemove from Playlist: Deletes the selected item from the playlist. bShuffle/Repeat: Plays the items in the Now Playing playlist randomly/repeatedly. bSave Playlist: Saves the current playlist. bClear Now Playing: Deletes all items from the Now Playing playlist. bError Details: Displays error information about the selected item (an exclamation mark appears before the item name if error details are available). bProperties: Displays information about the selected file. 47 Multimedia When you are viewing the Library screen, the following commands appear on the Menu. bQueue Up: Adds the selected item to the end of the current Now Playing playlist. bDelete from Library: Deletes the selected item from the library. bNow Playing: Displays the Now Playing screen. bLibrary: Displays the Library screen so you can choose a file to play. bUpdate Library: Adds new items to the library by searching your device or storage card. bOpen File: Lets you find and play files that are stored on your device or storage card but that are not in the library. bOpen URL: Lets you play a file on a network, such as the Internet. bProperties: Displays information about the selected file. bPlayer: Open the Window media player. 48 FM Radio You can search for your favorite radio stations and enjoy listening to the radio. Note bYou must connect the supplied earphones or use Bluetooth headsets to use the FM Radio. 1. From the Today screen, select Start > FM Radio. 2. Press the navigation left and right keys to select the radio station to listen to. TIP! Press and hold the navigation left and right keys to find stations. Multimedia 3. Select Channel to tune in to a preset station. When no preset channel is available, execute Auto Scan. 4. To close radio, select Menu > Exit. To Use Radio Options From the FM Radio screen, select Menu and choose any of the following options: bListen Via: Allows you to select to listen to the radio via Wired HeadSet, Speaker. bEdit: Allows you to edit the station set on a channel. bAdd New: Allows you to add a new channel. bStation Info On / Off: Enable or disable station information display. bAF Off / On: Enable or disable Alternate Frequency (AF). bAlarm: Allows you to set radio alarm. 49 Applications Internet Explorer With Internet Explorer you can view web sites and surf the Internet on your device just like you do on a computer. From the Today screen, select Start > Internet Explorer. In the address bar, enter the web address you want to visit or choose from previously entered addresses from Favorites or History. Press the left or right soft key to display the function bar. You can do the following by selecting Menu. bFavorites: You can view and select from the list of your favorite web sites. bAdd to Favorites: Select to add the currently displayed web site to your Favorites. bGo to Web Address: Select to place cursor on the address bar and enter the web address that you want to visit manually. bHome Page: Select to visit the home page. bHistory: Select to view the history list of recently visited web pages. 50 bForward: Select to go to the next page. bRefresh: Select to refresh the current web page. bView: Select the view options. • Text Size: Select the font size for the page you are viewing. • Enable ActiveX Controls: Select this option to enable ActiveX Controls. • Mobile: Select this option to view the page in mobile format. • Desktop: Select this option to view the page in desktop format. bTools: Select to change browser options such as Speed Link, Properties and other options. bCopy/Paste: Allows you to use copy and paste functions. bExit: Select to exit the browser. Applications To zoom the page bSelect Zoom then use the up and down navigation keys to zoom in or out the web page. Note bBrowsing the internet may incur additional charges. Charges vary depending on the type of connection (i.e. GPRS, ActiveSync, or WiFi). Please contact your network operator for further information. Windows Live™ With the pre-installed Windows Live™ on your device, you can access Hotmail, search the web and synchronize your Contacts. To Set Up Windows Live™ 1. From the Today screen, select Start > Windows Live. 2. Select Sign in to Windows Live. 3. Read the license agreement then select Accept. TIP! bTo avoid typing your name and password each time you log in, select the Save Password box. 4. Enter your e-mail address and password then select Next. 5. Select what you want to sync on your device then select Next. 6. When finished, select Done. Using Hotmail 1. From the Today screen, select Start > Windows Live. 2. Select Hotmail. 3. To synchronize e-mail, select Menu > Send/Receive. 51 Applications Windows Live™ Contacts After setting up Windows Live™, you can synchronize Contacts to your device. To add Windows Live™ contacts 1. From the Today screen, select Contacts > New. 2. Select Windows Live. 3. Enter the contact information, in the Email field, enter the e-mail address. 4. When finished, select Done. Using Windows Live™ Search 1. From the Today screen, select Start > Windows Live. 2. Enter the word(s) to search on the search bar, then press the Enter key. 3. Internet Browser opens and displays the search results. 52 ActiveSync ActiveSync synchronizes information on your device with information on your PC, such as Outlook content. ActiveSync can also synchronize over a cellular network with Microsoft Exchange Server, if your company or service provider is running Microsoft Exchange Server with Exchange ActiveSync. When you synchronize, ActiveSync compares the information on your device with the information on your PC and/or Exchange Server and updates all locations with the most recent information. With ActiveSync, you can: bSynchronize information, such as Outlook E-mail, Contacts, Calendar, or Tasks information on your device with your PC, as well as pictures, video, and music. bSynchronize Outlook E-mail, Contacts, Calendar appointments, and Tasks on your device directly with Exchange Server so that you can stay up to date even when your PC is turned off. bExchange files between your device and your PC without synchronizing. Applications bSelect which types of information are synchronized and specify how much information is synchronized. For example, you can choose how many weeks of past Calendar appointments to synchronize. Install ActiveSync on your PC. Once ActiveSync is installed, you can synchronize your device with the PC. You can download ActiveSync from the Microsoft’s website (http://www.microsoft.com) and install it on your PC. Once you have installed ActiveSync and set up a synchronization relationship, ActiveSync on the PC recognizes your device when you connect it, and automatically transfers the synchronization settings you specified on your device. You may be able to synchronize your device with Exchange Server through your company or wireless service provider. If you plan to do so, obtain e-mail address, Exchange Server address, user name, password, and domain name from your administrator before starting the Sync Setup Wizard. Setting up Windows Vista™ Instead of ActiveSync, Windows Vista™ uses the Microsoft Windows Mobile™ Device Center. Note bSome versions of Windows Vista come with Windows Mobile Device Center already installed. If Windows Mobile Device center is not available on your Windows Vista, you can download it from Microsoft’s website (http://www.microsoft.com) and install it on your PC. Set up synchronization in Windows Mobile Device Center When you connect your device to your PC and start Windows Mobile Device Center for the first time, you are asked to create a Windows Mobile partnership with your device. Follow the steps below to create a partnership. bConnect your device to your PC. Windows Mobile Device Center configures itself and then opens. bOn the license agreement screen, click Accept. bOn the Windows Mobile Device Center’s Home screen, click Set up your device. 53 Applications Note bChoose Connect without setting up your device if you only want to transfer media files, check for updates, and explore your device but not sync Outlook information. bSelect the items you want to synchronize, then click Next. bEnter a device name and click Set Up. When you finish the setup wizard, Windows Mobile Device Center synchronizes your device automatically. Notice that Outlook e-mails and other information will appear on your device after synchronization. Use Windows Mobile Device Center To open Windows Mobile Device Center, click Start > All Programs > Windows Mobile Device Center on your Windows Vista computer. On Windows Mobile Device Center, you can do the following: bClick Mobile Device Settings to change synchronization settings. 54 bWhen you click Pictures, Music and Video > ___ new pictures/video clips are available for import, a wizard guides you to tag and transfer photos from your device to the Photo Gallery on your Windows Vista PC. bClick Pictures, Music and Video > Add media to your device from Windows Media Player to synchronize music and video files using Windows Media™ Player. bClick File Management > Browse the contents of your device to view documents and files from your device. Setting up Windows XP If you are using Windows XP, download ActiveSync from Microsoft’s website (http://www.microsoft.com) then follow the steps below to install and set up ActiveSync on your PC. bFollow the on-screen instructions to install ActiveSync. bAfter installation is completed, connect your device to your PC using the sync cable. - Connect the smaller end of the USB cable to your LG GW550 device. - Connect the larger end of the USB cable to the USB port on your computer. Applications bThe Synchronization Setup Wizard automatically starts and guides you to create a synchronization relationship. Click Next to proceed. bTo synchronize your device with your computer, clear the Synchronize directly with a server running Microsoft Exchange Server check box, and then click Next. bSelect the information types that you want to synchronize, and then click Next. bClick Finish. When you finish the wizard, ActiveSync synchronizes your device automatically. Synchronizing Information When you connect your device to the PC using a USB or a Bluetooth connection, ActiveSync will immediately synchronize. While the device is connected, ActiveSync synchronizes every time you make a change on either the PC or the device. Synchronizing Outlook information If you have set up a synchronization relationship between your device and the PC, synchronization keeps Outlook information up-to-date on both computers. ActiveSync synchronizes a limited amount of information by default to save storage space on your device. You can change the amount of information synchronized for a given information type in Settings for the information type. You can set up your device to synchronize with more than one PC or with a combination of one or more PCs and Exchange Server. When synchronizing with multiple computers, the items that you synchronize will appear on all of the computers with which they are synchronized. For example, if you have set up synchronization with two PCs (PC1 and PC2), which have different items, and you synchronize Contacts and Calendar on the device with both computers, the result is as follows: 55 Applications Location New state PC1 All Outlook contacts and calendar appointments that were on PC2 are now also on PC1. PC2 All Outlook contacts and calendar appointments that were on PC1 are now also on PC2. Device All Outlook contacts and calendar appointments from both PC1 and PC2 are on the device. To start and stop synchronization bTo synchronize Outlook information and other local information on the PC, including media files, connect your device to the PC using Bluetooth or a cable. bIf you are synchronizing directly with the Exchange Server, you can use the PC connection to the network that is “Desktop Pass-through”, or you can synchronize without connecting to the PC over a cellular network. bIn ActiveSync, select Sync. To end synchronization before it completes, select Stop. 56 bTo change which information is synchronized 1. In ActiveSync on the device, select Menu > Options. 2. Do one or both of the following: bSelect the check box for any items you want to synchronize. If you cannot select a check box, you might have to clear the check box for the same information type elsewhere in the list. bClear the check box for any items you want to stop synchronizing. 3. To stop synchronizing with one PC completely, select the PC and select Delete. Note bOutlook e-mail can be synchronized with only one computer. To change available synchronization settings, select the type of information and select Settings. Applications To synchronize directly with Exchange Server You can set up synchronization with Exchange Server on your device, if it is available to you through your company or wireless service provider. However, you should first ask your administrator for the following information and then carry on with the steps: e-mail address, Exchange Server address, user name, password, and domain name. 1. In ActiveSync on the device, select Menu > Configure Server. If you have not yet set up synchronization with Exchange Server, this will say Add Server Source. 2. Enter e-mail address, and select Next. 3. In the Server address, enter the address of the running Exchange Server, check the box if this Server requires an encrypted (SSL) connection, and select Next. 4. Enter your user name, password, and domain, then select Next. To change the rules for resolving synchronization conflicts, select Advanced. 5. Select the check boxes for the types of items that you want to synchronize with the Exchange Server. 6. To change available synchronization settings, select the settings desired and select Settings. 7. Select Finish. Synchronizing via Bluetooth You can connect your device to the PC to synchronize using Bluetooth. To synchronize with a PC via Bluetooth 1. First, check “Allow connections to one of the following” of the ActiveSync connection Settings menu on your PC. Select the proper COM port. If there is not an available connection, then you should make a Bluetooth pairing. 2. Select the Menu > Connect via Bluetooth. 57 Applications 58 Synchronizing Musics, Videos, and Pictures Change Media synchronization settings If you want to carry your music or other digital media with you along while you travel, ActiveSync works with Windows Media Player to synchronize music, video, and pictures. Other than selecting the Media information type in ActiveSync to be synchronized, all media synchronization settings must be set in Windows Media Player. Before media can be synchronized, you must do the following: bInstall Windows Media Player Version 10 on the PC. bConnect your device to the PC with a USB cable. If the device is currently connected using Bluetooth, you must end that connection before media can be synchronized. bInsert a storage card into your device (32MB or larger is recommended). bSet up a sync partnership between the storage card and Windows Media Player. Once you select the Media information type in ActiveSync to be synchronized, any of your favorite music, video, and picture files in Windows Media Player playlists can be synchronised. All you have to do is set up synchronization in Windows Media Player for those media files. To set up a sync relationship with a storage card: 1. Open Windows Media Player. 2. Click the Sync tab. 3. Select the storage card. 4. Click Set up Sync. Applications Internet Sharing Bluetooth Manager You can set up your PC to connect to the Internet using the Internet connection on your device. Bluetooth enables compatible mobile devices, peripherals and computers that are in close proximity to communicate directly with each other without wires. Your device supports built-in Bluetooth connectivity, which makes it possible to connect it with compatible Bluetooth headsets, computer applications and so on. Note bActiveSync software version 4.5 or higher is required. 1. Connect the USB cable to the PC. 2. From the Today screen, select Start > Internet Sharing. 3. Set PC Connection to USB or Bluetooth PAN. 4. Set the Network Connection to a proper APN. 5. Select Connect. 6. A data connection indicator ( / / ) is displayed when PDP activation is performed successfully. To Set the Bluetooth Configuration 1. From the Today screen, select Start > Bluetooth. 2. Select Yes to turn on Bluetooth. The Bluetooth Manager Settings page is displayed. Note bThe operating system of your PC must be Windows XP, Service Pack 2 or higher. 59 Applications To Make Your Device Discoverable 1. From the Settings page, highlight Not Discoverable then press the Enter key. 2. Select visibility option (Always Visible, Visible for 60 seconds, Not Visible). 3. Select Done. Bluetooth Partnership Note bIf you use a PC Sync via Bluetooth, you can exchange data within Contacts. bWhen you receive data from another Bluetooth device, the device requests a confirmation. After confirming the transfer, the file will be copied to your device. bYou can set the shared folder in Settings > Advanced... > File Transfer. 60 A Bluetooth partnership is a relationship that you create between your device and another Bluetooth-enabled device in order to exchange information in a secure manner. Creating a partnership between two devices involves entering the same personal identification number (PIN) or Passkey on both devices. Creating a partnership between two devices is a one-time process. Once a partnership is created, the devices can recognize the partnership and exchange information without entering a PIN again. Make sure the two devices are within a range of 10 meters from one another, and Bluetooth is turned on and in discoverable mode. Applications To create a Bluetooth Partnership To Accept a Bluetooth Partnership 1. From the Settings page, select Add a device. 2. To limit the search, select the type of device you want to establish connection with. 1. Ensure that the Bluetooth is turned on. 2. When prompted, enter a passkey (the same passkey that is entered on the device requesting the partnership) to establish a secure connection. 3. Select OK. Note bMake sure the other device and its Bluetooth function is turned on and discoverable. 3. Select Continue. Your device searches for the other device. 4. Highlight the device, then select Select. 5. Enter a passkey, then select OK. Note bThe passkey you enter must also be the same passkey to be entered on the other device. bThe passkey must be 1 to 16 characters. Services After establishing connection with a Bluetooth device, you can activate and set the configuration of each Bluetooth profile. Select Menu > Update. A list of services is shown. bSerial Port: Connect to a wireless serial port on the device. bSynchronization: Synchronize contacts and other PIM items. bBluetooth Networking: Share information or connect to the Internet. 61 Applications Settings Page Accessories Page From the Settings page, the following options are available: bAdd a Device: Select to set up a new Bluetooth partnership. bDisable Bluetooth: Turns Bluetooth off. bLG-GW550: The default device name as seen by other Bluetooth devices. Select this option to change the name. bNot Discoverable/Discoverable: Select this option to set visibility status of your device. bAdvanced: The following options are available: bNetworking Manager: Allows you to network with other Bluetooth devices (Create a Private Network, Share Internet Connection, Access Internet through remote device). bBusiness Card Exchange: Allows you to send and receive business cards from other devices. bBT Send Object: Allows you to send an object, such as an item or items in Contacts, Outlook E-mail, Calendar, Audio, Ring Tones, Images, and Videos. • Connectivity: Select to set the devices to allow connection. • Serial Ports: Select to view Bluetooth serial ports. • File Transfer: Allows you to configure file transfer settings. • Audio: Allows you to configure handsfree related settings. • Object Exchange: Allows you to configure Object Push settings. 62 My Devices Page This page lists all Bluetooth devices that you have established partnership with. bTo add more devices, select Menu > Add Device. bTo delete a selected device, select Menu > Delete. bTo update services, select Menu > Update. Applications Office Mobile Excel Mobile Excel Mobile makes it easy for you to open and edit Excel workbooks and templates created on your PC. To open an Excel file 1. From the Today screen, select Start > Office Mobile > Excel Mobile. 2. Locate the Excel file, then select Select. To change view options, select View. For other functions, select Menu. bClose File: Select to close the file and exit Excel Mobile. bEdit: Select this option to edit the opened file. bFile: Allows you to save the file (Save As), or send the file via e-mail. bGo to: Allows you to go to a particular cell or reference name. bFind: Allows you to find matching word(s) in the file. bAbout: View software version. Unsupported features in Excel Mobile Excel Mobile does not fully support some features such as formulas and cell comments. Some data and formatting may be lost when you save the workbook on your device. Note the following Excel Mobile formatting considerations: bAlignment. Horizontal, vertical, and wrap-text attributes remain the same, but vertical text appears horizontal. bBorders. Appear as a single line. bCell patterns. Patterns applied to cells are removed. bFonts and font sizes. Fonts not supported by your device are mapped to the closest font available. The original font is listed on your device. When the workbook is opened in Excel on your PC again, the data is displayed in the original font. bNumber formats. Numbers formatted using the Microsoft Excel 2007 Version 6.1 conditional formatting feature are displayed in Number format. 63 Applications bFormulas and functions. If an Excel file contains a function that is not supported by Excel Mobile, the function is removed, and only the returned value of the function appears. The following formulas are also converted to values: formulas entered as an array or containing an array argument, for example, =SUM({1;2;3;4}); formulas containing external link references or an intersection range reference; and formulas containing references past row 16384 are replaced with #REF! bProtection settings. Most worksheet and workbook protection features are disabled but not removed. However, support for password protection has been removed. Workbooks that are password-protected or workbooks in which one or more worksheets are password-protected cannot be opened. You must remove the password protection in Excel on the PC and then synchronise to open the file on the device. bZoom settings. Are not retained. Excel supports a per worksheet zoom setting, while the Excel Mobile zoom setting is applied to the entire workbook. bWorksheet names. Names that reference worksheets within the same workbook are 64 displayed accurately, but names that refer to other workbooks, arrays, for example, ={1;2;3;4}, array formulas, or intersection ranges are removed from the name list. If a name is removed from the list, it is left in formulas and functions, causing those formulas to be resolved as “#NAME?”. All hidden names are not hidden. bAutoFilter settings. Are removed. However, you can use the AutoFilter command in Excel Mobile to perform similar functions. If you have an AutoFilter applied to a worksheet that causes rows to be hidden, the rows remain hidden when the file is opened in Excel Mobile. Use the Unhide command to display the hidden rows. bChart formatting. All charts will be saved the way they are shown in Excel Mobile. Unsupported chart types are changed to one of these supported types: Column, Bar, Line, Pie, Scatter, and Area. Background colors, gridlines, data labels, trend lines, shadows, 3D effects, secondary axes, and logarithmic scales are turned off. bWorksheet features. The following features are not supported in Excel Mobile and are removed or modified when a workbook is opened on the device: hidden sheets are not hidden; VBA modules, Applications macro sheets, and dialog sheets are removed and replaced with a place holder sheet; text boxes, drawing objects, pictures, lists, conditional formats, and controls are removed; pivot table data is converted to values. OneNote Mobile OneNote Mobile allows you to create notes with added pictures and recordings. To create a new note 1. From the Today screen, select Start > Office Mobile > OneNote Mobile. 2. Select New. 3. Compose your note. 4. When finished, select Done. For other functions, select Menu. bFormat: Select font style. bList: Allows you to add or clear bullets and numbers. bTake Picture: Select this option to capture an image and insert to note. bInsert Picture: Allows you to add a picture that is saved on your device. bInsert Recording: Allows you to record a voice note. PowerPoint Mobile With PowerPoint Mobile, you can open and view slide show presentations created on your PC in *.ppt and *.pps format with PowerPoint ‘97 and later. Many presentation elements built into the slide shows such as slide transitions and animations will play back on the device. If the presentation is set up as a timed slide show, one slide will advance to the next automatically. Links to URLs are also supported. PowerPoint features not supported on the device include: bNotes. Notes written for slides will not be visible. bRearranging or editing slides. PowerPoint Mobile is a viewer only. bFile formats. Files created in *.ppt format earlier than PowerPoint ‘97 and HTML files in *.htm and *.mht formats are not supported. 65 Applications To start a slide show presentation To zoom the slide show 1. From the Today screen, select Start > Office Mobile > PowerPoint Mobile. 2. Locate the the slide show you want to view, then select Select. If the presentation is set up as a timed slide show, slides will advance automatically. 1. From the Today screen, select Start > Office Mobile > PowerPoint Mobile. 2. Open the presentation. 3. Select Menu > Zoom In or Zoom Out. To stop a slide show • In a PowerPoint Mobile presentation, select End. To navigate between slides You can advance to the next slide if a presentation is not set up as a timed slide show, return to the previous slide, or go to any slide out of sequence. 1. From the Today screen, select Start > Office Mobile > PowerPoint Mobile. 2. Open the desired presentation. 3. Select Menu > Next or Previous, or Go to Slide then select the desired slide. TIP! bSimply press the left or right navigation keys to advance to the next slide or return to the previous slide. 66 Word Mobile Word Mobile is a streamlined version of Microsoft Word. Word documents created on your PC can be opened and edited on your device and save them as *.doc, *.rtf, *.txt, and *.dot files. You can have only one document open at a time. To open another document, you have to close the first one. When you close a document, the device will automatically prompt you to save the document. If you selected to save, you can rename the document with your preferred name and move it to another folder or a storage card. Word Mobile does not fully support some features of Microsoft Word such as revision marks and password protection. Some data and formatting may be lost when you save the document on your device. The following features are not supported in Word Mobile. Applications • Backgrounds • Shapes and text boxes • Artistic page borders • Smart tags • Metafiles bBi-directional text. While Word Mobile will open documents containing bi-directional text, the indentations and alignment may be displayed and saved incorrectly. bPassword-protected files. Word Mobile does not support opening passwordprotected documents. You must first remove the password protection in Word on the PC if you want to view the document on the device. bDocument protection. Word Mobile does not support displaying files that have been protected in Word on the PC. The following features are partially supported in Word Mobile. bPicture bullets bRevision marks. When you open a document that has revision marks in Word Mobile, the document appears as if all revision marks were accepted. When you save the document in Word Mobile, revision marks are lost. bTable styles. When you save a document in Word Mobile, some or all the formatting that is defined in the table style is lost. bUnderline styles. Underline styles not supported by Word Mobile are mapped to one of the four supported styles: regular, dotted, wavy, or thick/bold/wide. bLegacy Pocket Word files. You can open *.psw files in Word Mobile; however, if you edit a file, you will need to save it in *.doc, *.rtf, *.txt, or *.dot format. The following features are not supported on the device; however, they are retained in the file so that when a file is opened on the PC again, they appear as expected. bFootnotes, endnotes, headers, footers. bPage breaks: Word Mobile does not display breaks between pages. However, all page breaks except for breaks at the end of a document are retained in the document. bLists: When you open the document on the computer again, indented lists are displayed in the original form. bFonts and font sizes. Fonts not supported by the device are mapped to the closest font available, although the original font will be listed on the device. 67 Applications Adobe Reader LE Adobe Reader® LE is an application for viewing PDF (Portable Document Format) files on your device. 5. You can change the way programs are viewed or ordered by selecting Menu > View or Sort by. 6. To close Task Manager, select Menu > Exit. To open a PDF file 1. From the Today screen, select Start > Adobe Reader LE. 2. Browse for the PDF file you want to open, then select Open. 3. To zoom the file, select Tools > Zoom. 4. To close the application, select Menu > Exit. Task Manager 68 In most cases, programs automatically close to free up needed memory, however, you can close programs manually using Task Manager. 1. From the Today screen, select Start > Accessories > Task Manager. 2. You can check the list of running programs, memory and CPU information. 3. You can end the programs manually by highlighting a program and selecting End Task. 4. To close all running programs, select Menu > End All Tasks. MSN Money Allows you have quick access to MSN Money and view the latest stocks exchange information on your device. Note bBefore accessing MSN Money, make sure your device has a GPRS SIM card installed. bAdditional costs may be incurred when using this service. MSN Weather Allows you to connect to the Internet and view the latest weather forecast from MSN Weather. Applications Note bBefore accessing MSN Weather, make sure your device has a GPRS SIM card installed. bAdditional costs may be incurred when using this service. Java Your device supports Java and hence you can easily download java games and other java applications from the internet. Note bAdditional costs may be incurred when using this service. GPS Accelerator Allows you to download GPS data and to enhance GPS peroformance. Note bBefore accessing GPS Accelerator, make sure your device has a GPRS SIM card installed. bAdditional costs may be incurred when using this service. AGPS Setting Allow you to use AGPS to shorten the time a GPS module used to determine its location. Marketplace Windows® Marketplace for mobile is a new marketplace that will provide direct-to-phone mobile applications and can be accessed from both the phone and the Web. bFrom the Today screen, select Start > Marketplace. Note bBefore accessing Marketplace, make sure your device has a GPRS SIM card installed. bAdditional costs may be incurred when using this service. 69 Applications Microsoft My Phone Remote Desktop Microsoft® My Phone synchronizes your phone’s contacts, calendar, tasks, text messages, music, photos, videos, and other documents with your My Phone account at http://myphone.microsoft.com. Remote Desktop provides remote access to the desktop of your computer running Windows XP Professional, from your device. Using Remote Desktop you can, for example, connect to your office computer from home and access all your applications, files, and network resources as though you were in front of your computer at the office. bFrom the Today screen, select Start > Remote Desktop. To Configure My Phone 1. From the Today screen, select Start > Microsoft My Phone. 2. Select Next. 3. Read the license, then select Accept. 4. Sign in your Windows Live ID, then select Sign In. 5. Select synchronization method: Manual or Automatic, then select Next. 6. Select Finish to start synchronization. RSS Viewer RSS Viewer is an application that allows you to subscribe to RSS feeds and view them on your device. To Subscribe to RSS Feeds Note bBefore accessing Microsoft My Phone, make sure your device has a GPRS SIM card installed. 70 1. From the Today screen, select Start > RSS Viewer. 2. Select Menu > Add Channel. 3. Enter the URL and Channel name and set folder location, select Done. Applications To Update RSS Feeds 1. Highlight the folder or channel then press the Enter key. A check mark appears on the folder / channel box. 2. Select Menu > Update to start updating. To View RSS Feeds 1. Highlight the channel then select View. 2. Highlight the news feed you want to view from the list. 3. Press the Enter key to view the rest of the story. 4. You can view the next or previous news feed on the list by selecting Menu > Next or Previous. 5. If you wish to view the news feed with Internet Explorer, select Menu > Open with IE. 6. To refresh page, select Menu > ReLoad. 7. To return to list view, select List View. Note bAdditional costs may be incurred when using this service. Live Search Widget Live Search Widget allows you to search the Internet using Live Search. With just a click of a button, you can launch Live Search in a standalone window. bFrom the Today screen, select Start > Search Widget. Note bBefore accessing Live Search Widget, make sure your device has a GPRS SIM card installed. bAdditional costs may be incurred when using this service. File Explorer The File Explorer application allows you to open an explorer window similar to a desktop Windows based system. The explorer window allows you to navigate through your phone to locate desired folders and files. You can also quickly manage, delete, copy, or edit any files and folders on your phone and create new folders. To access File Explorer, from the Today screen, select Start > File Explorer. 71 Applications bIf you want to see the files or folders in the My device or Storage Card folder, select either of the two. bTo view the files or folders in the phone’s memory, highlight the files or folders that you want to view, then press the Enter key. bSelect the folder category (labelled My Documents by default) and then the folder that you want to view. 1. From the Today screen, select Start > Voice Notes. 2. Highlight the recording from the list. 3. Select Menu > Rename to rename the file. 4. Enter the new name, then select Done. To delete recording Voice Notes allows you to record your voice notes. 1. From the Today screen, select Start > Voice Notes. 2. Highlight the recording that you want to delete from the list. 3. Select Menu > Delete. To create a new voice note Calendar Voice Notes 1. From the Today screen, select Start > Voice Notes. 2. Select Record to start recording. 3. Select Stop to stop recording. The recording is automatically saved with a default file name. 4. To close voice notes, press . To listen to the voice note 72 To rename the file 1. From the Today screen, select Start > Voice Notes. 2. Select Menu > Play to playback recording. To Add an Event to your Calendar 1. From the Today screen, select Start > Calendar. 2. Select the desired date. 3. Select Menu > New Appointment. 4. Type in the subject and location of the event and check the date and enter time you would like your event to begin. 5. Check other information below. 6. When finished writing your note, select Done. Applications To Change your Default Calendar View To Change the Priority of a Task 1. From the Today screen, select Start > Calendar. 2. Select Menu > Day View / Week View / Month View / Agenda View. Before you can sort tasks by priority, you need to specify a priority level for each task. 1. From the Today screen, select Start > Tasks. 2. Select the desired task, then select Edit. 3. In the Priority box, select a priority level. 4. Select Done to return to the task list. Tasks Use Tasks to keep track of things you need to do. A task can occur once or repeatedly (recurring). You can set reminders for your tasks and you can organize them using categories. Your tasks are displayed in a task list. Overdue tasks are displayed in red. To Create a Task 1. From the Today screen, select Start > Tasks. 2. Select Menu > New Task. 3. Enter a subject for the task, and fill in information such as start and due dates, priority, and so on. 4. When finished, select Done. Note bYou can easily create a short, to-dotype task. Simply enter the text on the Enter new task here bar. Note bAll new tasks are assigned with Normal priority by default. To Set a Default reminder for all New Tasks You can have a reminder automatically turned on for all new tasks you create. 1. From the Today screen, select Start > Tasks. 2. Select Menu > Options. 3. Check the Set reminders for new items box. 4. Select Done to return to the task list. Note bThe new tasks must have due dates set in order for the reminder to take effect. 73 Applications To Show Start and Due Dates in the Task List Calculator 1. From the Today screen, select Start > Tasks. 2. Select Menu > Options. 3. Check the Show start and due dates box. 4. Select Done to return to the task list. The calculator function allows you to add, subtract, multiply and divide. You can input numbers using the number keys, and input operators using button keys. bFrom the Today screen, select Start > Accessories > Calculator. To Locate a Task StopWatch When your list of tasks is long, you can sort the list to quickly find a specific task. 1. From the Today screen, select Start > Tasks. 2. In the task list, do one of the following: bSort the list. Select Menu > Sort by, then select the sort option. bFilter the list by category. Select Menu > Filter, then select the category you want displayed. Note bTo filter your tasks further, select Menu > Filter > Active Tasks or Completed Tasks. 74 StopWatch allows you to start and stop time for exact timing. 1. From the Today screen, select Start > StopWatch. 2. To start timing, select Start. The running time is displayed as HH.MM.SS.hh (hours, minutes, seconds, hundredths of a second). 3. During the timing, you can record an individual lap time by selecting Lap. The lap times are listed on screen. Up to 99 lap times can be recorded. 4. To stop timer, select Stop. 5. You can either resume or reset the stopwatch by selecting Resume or Reset. Applications Games In the Games submenu, Windows games like Bubble Breaker and Solitaire, have been already been pre-installed on your device. bFrom the Today screen, select Start > Games, then select the desired game. XT9 Dictionaries The XT9 Dictionaries allows you to add your own words into the My Words XT9 dictionary. It also allows you to configure automatic substitution. To add a word in XT9 1. From the Today screen, select Start > XT9 Dictionaries. 2. Select My Words XT9, then press the Enter key. 3. Select Add. 4. Type the word to add in the dictionary, then select Done. 5. To close My Words function, select Menu > Exit. To edit a word in XT9 1. From the Today screen, select Start > XT9 Dictionaries. 2. Select My Words XT9, then press the Enter key. 3. Highlight the word you want to edit, then select Menu > Edit. 4. Type the word to add in the dictionary, then select Done. To delete a word in XT9 1. From the Today screen, select Start > XT9 Dictionaries. 2. Select My Words XT9, then press the Enter key. 3. Highlight the word you want to delete, then select Menu > Delete. 4. To delete all the words in the My Words list, select Menu > Delete All. Select Yes to confirm. 75 Applications To add auto-substitution shortcut 1. From the Today screen, select Start > XT9 Dictionaries. 2. Select Auto-Substitution XT9, then press the Enter key. 3. To add a shortcut, select Add. 4. Type the shortcut word and the word to substitute, then select Done. To edit auto-substitution shortcut 1. From the Today screen, select Start > XT9 Dictionaries. 2. Select Auto-Substitution XT9, then press the Enter key. 3. Highlight the word to edit, then select Menu > Edit. 4. Type the shortcut word and the word to substitute, then select Done. To delete auto-substitution shortcut 1. From the Today screen, select Start > XT9 Dictionaries. 2. Select Auto-Substitution XT9, then press the Enter key. 3. Highlight the word to delete, select Menu > Delete. 76 XT9 Settings Use XT9 Settings to select the dictionary language and other word prediction settings. 1. From the Today screen, select Start > XT9 Settings. 2. In the Language list, select the desired language. Options are: English, Portuguese, Spanish, French, Italian, and German. 3. In the Word Completion Point list, select how many typed letters do you want the dictionary to start word completion. 4. To enable other options, check their corresponding boxes. 5. When finished, select Done. Smart Applicatin Smart Application consists of a set of applications offered by your phone. You can put the application you want on Smart Application. Settings To configure the settings on your device, from the Today screen, select Start > Settings, then select the settings category. Call barring affects all voice and data calls, except emergency calls. Phone Allows you to forward your incoming calls to another phone number. You can edit the general settings related to making and receiving calls. Call Options Auto Answer Set how quickly calls are automatically answered during hands-free operation. This setting does not apply when the ring type is Silent. Band Switch You can change the settings related to Network. Call Barring You can set restrictions for the following calls: bBlock incoming calls: All calls/When roaming/Off. bBlock outgoing calls: All calls/ International/International except to home country/Off. To edit mobile call barring settings, you need a password. You obtain the barring password from your service provider upon subscription to this network service. Call Forwarding You can configure the following options: bAny key answer: Check the box to answer a call by pressing any key. bShow SIM contacts: Check the box to display your contacts saved in the SIM card. bVoice mail number: Call the voice mail number to listen to your voice messages. Voice mail number is automatically configured upon receiving network service from your service provider. bText messages service center: Service center number for all text messages. The service center number is automatically configured upon receiving network service from your service provider. bCountry code: Enter the country code in your location. bArea code: Enter the area code in your location. 77 Settings Call Waiting To be notified of incoming calls while you have a call in progress, check Provide call waiting notifications, then select Done. Caller ID To display your phone number to the person you are calling, select Everyone. Select No one to hide it. Channels Allows you to receive cell broadcast messages. Fixed Dialing Allows you to limit outgoing calls in certain formats. Networks Displays the current network and allows you to select the manner of selecting networks. Current network The current network displays in the Current network field. Network selection Define how to choose between different available networks when travelling, for example. bManual: You can select the network yourself. 78 bAutomatic: To have the network selected automatically. Preferred network To select other networks, from the Networks page, select Menu > Preferred network (retrieving settings may take a few minutes). Select a network and re-order the priorities for network usage by selecting Menu > Move Up or Move Down. Pre-Defined Text Messages Your device has pre-defined text messages that you can send a caller when you cannot answer a call. To edit pre-defined text message 1. Highlight the pre-defined text message, then select Select. 2. Edit the message. 3. When finished, select Save. Ringer Output Allows you to select how your phone plays the ringtone when using headset. Sounds bRing tone: You can select the ringtone for incoming voice calls. bReminders: You can select the alert tone for reminder. Settings bNew e-mail: You can select the alert tone that sounds when a new e-mail is received. bNew text message: You can select the alert tone that sounds when a new text message is received. bNew voice message: You can select the alert tone that sounds when a new voice message is received. bNew instant message: You can select the alert tone that sounds when a new instant message is received. bNew channel message: You can select the alert tone that sounds when a new channel message is received. bSIM toolkit messages: You can select the alert tone that sounds when SIM toolkit messages are received. bExclamation: You can select the alert tone that sounds when the device pops up information. bQuestion: You can select the alert tone that sounds when the device prompts the user with a question. bWarnings: You can select the alert tone that sounds when the device displays a warning message. bKeypad control: You can set the key tone when keys are pressed. Profiles Your device comes with five pre-set profiles. You can adjust and customise the ringing tones, alert tones, and other device tones for different events, environments, or caller groups. To edit the profile 1. Highlight the profile. 2. Select Menu > Edit. 3. Enter the name and select your desired ringer and alert settings. 4. When finished, select Done. To change the active profile Highlight the profile and press the Enter key. The checked profile name indicates the current profile in use. Home Screen You can change how you want the Today screen to look. The Today screen can show your upcoming appointments, active tasks, and information about calls and messages. To Select Information Shown On Screen 1. From the Today screen, select Start > Settings > Home Screen. 79 Settings 2. On Home screen layout, select your desired layout option: bSliding Panel: This is the default screen. bSliding Panel Media: Select to display media application shortcuts on the screen. bWindows Simple bWindows Default bLarge Font bWindows Basic bWindows Live Default: Select to include Windows Live search bar and other Windows Live feature shortcuts on screen. 3. To display the recently opened programs when Start is selected, check Show Recent Programs. 4. When finished, select Done. To select color for your screen You can select color scheme for your screen. 1. From the Today screen, select Start > Settings > Home Screen. 2. In the Color scheme box, use the navigation keys to selet the a color to use. 3. When finished, select Done. To Add Own Background Image You can use one of your own pictures as the background image on the Today screen. 80 1. From the Today screen, select Start > Settings > Home Screen. 2. In the Background image box, use the navigation keys to select an image to use as background. 3. When finished, select Done. To Set Screen Timeout To define how long the backlight remains on: 1. From the Today screen, select Start > Settings > Home Screen. 2. In the Time out box, use the navigation keys to select a time out option. 3. When finished, select Done. Note User are able to set mp3 files in storage card root directory or storage card\my ringtones or my documents\my ringtones as ringtone. If users want to set background image or any sound from storage card, only image or sound files in storage card root directory can be set. WBMP images cannot be set as homescreen, WBMP images can only be viewed in the picture and video. Settings Clock & Alarm Connections Clock & Alarm can accessed by either of the following: bFrom the Today screen, select Start > Clock & Alarm. bFrom the Today screen, select Start > Settings > Clock & Alarm. The Connections menu allows you to setup various types of connections such as Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, Dial-Up, GPRS, and others. Date and Time You can view the time, day of the week and date. 1. From the Clock & Alarm screen, highlight Date and Time, then press the Enter key. 2. Select the Time zone. Set the date and time. 3. To update the time, date, and time zone information automatically, check Sync to current time zone. 4. When finished, select Done. Alarm 1. From the Clock & Alarm screen, highlight Alarm 1 or 2, then press the Enter key. 2. Set the alarm time, frequency, sound, type, and volume. 3. When finished, select Done. Wireless Manager Wireless Manager provides shortcuts to access Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, and Phone connection settings. Note bThe charge between using a data plan to access the internet and using Wi-Fi is different. Please contact your network operator for further information. Wi-Fi 1. From the Today screen, select Start > Settings > Connections > Wireless Manager. 2. To turn on, highlight the Wi-Fi bar, then press the Enter key. 3. The device prompts you whether you want to view available networks in range, select Yes. 4. Select the network and select “Internet” for the type of connection. 81 Settings 5. When finished, select Connect. Note bIf your Wi-Fi service provider or network administrator sets WEP encryption for network security, you should fill in WEP key in the pop-up window. If WEP encryption is not set, this pop-up window is not shown.If you don’t know the key, you need to ask it to your Wi-Fi service provider or network administrator. 6. Enter the required network key, then select Done. 7. If Wi-Fi connection is established, you can see the connection name (SSID) in the Wireless Manager. 8. To turn off Wi-Fi, select Wi-Fi in the Wireless Manager again. Configuring Wi-Fi Connection Settings Note bBefore you set the WLAN configuration, you need to ask your WLAN service provider or your network administrator for the IP settings. 82 WARNING! This device uses non-harmonised frequency and is intended for use in all European countries. The WLAN can be operated in the EU without restriction indoors, but cannot be operated outdoors in France. 1. From the Today screen, select Start > Settings > Connections > Wireless Manager. 2. Select Menu > Wi-Fi Settings > Menu > Advanced. 3. Enter the necessary network information and connection preferences. 4. When finished, select Done. To check WLAN status 1. From the Today screen, select Start > Settings > Connections > Wireless Manager. 2. Select Menu > Wi-Fi Settings. The list of available Wi-Fi connections and their status are displayed. bTo add a new Wi-Fi connection, select Menu > Add. bTo edit a Wi-Fi connection configuration, select Menu > Edit. Settings Bluetooth 1. From the Today screen, select Start > Settings > Connections > Wireless Manager. 2. To turn on/off, highlight the Bluetooth bar, then press the Enter key. 3. To configure settings, select Menu > Bluetooth Settings. The Bluetooth Manager program launches, see “Bluetooth Manager” on page 61. Phone 1. From the Today screen, select Start > Settings > Connections > Wireless Manager. 2. To turn on/off, highlight the Phone bar, then press the Enter key. 3. To configure phone settings, select Menu > Phone Settings. Security Device Lock You can keep your data more secure by requiring a password every time the device is turned on or when waking up from idle mode. 1. From the Today screen, select Start > Settings > More > Security > Device Lock. 2. Check the Prompt if phone unused for box, then select the idle time. 3. Set the password type and enter your desired password. 4. Re-enter the password to confirm. 5. When finished, select Done. Note bWhen the device locks, you will be prompted to enter the password to unlock. 83 Settings To Protect your Phone with a PIN You can protect your phone from unauthorized use by assigning a type of password called a PIN (personal identification number). Obtain the PIN from your wireless service provider; you can change the PIN at a later time. bFrom the Today screen, select Start > Settings > More > Security > Enable SIM PIN. To Change your Password bFrom the Today screen, select Start > Settings > More > Security > Change PIN2. To Enter Owner Information Saving your contact information on your device allows for easy identification of the device in case it is lost. bFrom the Today screen, select Start > Settings > More > Owner Information. Remove Programs To free up space on your device’s memory, remove unnecessary programs which are not pre-installed on your device. bFrom the Today screen, select Start > Settings > More > Remove Programs. 84 Power Management Use Power Management to see current battery status and configure battery usage to save on power. 1. From the Today screen, select Start > Settings > More > Power Management. 2. Set the backlight and display time out. 3. When finished, select Done. Accessibility Use Accessibility to select the system font size and configure time out options and volume. 1. From the Today screen, select Start > Settings > More > Accessibility. 2. Highlight an option: bSystem font size: Select the system font size from the list. bMultipress time out: Select the time out when multiple keys have been pressed at one time. bConfirmation time out: Select the time out after a confirmation has been executed. bIn-call alert volume: Select the alert volume level of incoming calls. 3. When finished, select Done. Settings Regional Settings Setup E-mail You can set the regional configuration and style in which numbers, currency, dates and time are displayed on your device. 1. From the Today screen, select Start > Settings > More >Regional Settings. 2. Highlight an option to change settings: bLanguage: Set the language. bLocale: Select the region where you are. bShort date style: Select how you want the numeric date format to appear on screen. bLong date style: Select how you want the alphanumeric date format to appear on screen. bTime format: Select how you want the time format to appear on screen. bPositive and Negative number: Set the decimal symbol, number of decimal places, digit grouping symbol, and negative number format. bPositive and Negative currency: Set the currency symbol, symbol position, decimal symbol, number of decimal places, digit grouping symbol, and negative number format. 3. When finished, select Done. You can setup an e-mail account by either of the following. bFrom the Today screen, select Start > Settings > More >More > Managed Programs. See ‘To Set Up an E-mail Account’ for more details. Managed Programs Use Managed Programs to view a list of programs that has been installed on your device. bFrom the Today screen, select Start > Settings > More > More > Managed Programs. 85 Accessories Package Contents Check to make sure the following items come with your device. Power Adaptor Data Cable Earphones ENGLISH ǠŮǍŸ GW550 User Guide Standard Battery www.lgmobile.com P/N : MMBB0359220 (1.0) User Guide Note bAlways use genuine LG accessories. bFailure to do so may invalidate your warranty. bAccessories may vary in different regions: please check with your regional service company or agent for further information. 86 GSM 850 / E-GSM 900 / DCS 1800 / PCS 1900 Quad Band and WCDMA Terminal Equipment GW550 / GW550h EN 301 489-01 v1.6.1 / EN 301 489-07 v1.3.1 / EN 301 489-17 v.1.2.1 / EN 301 489-19 v1.2.1 / EN 301 489-24 V1.4.1 EN 300 328 V 1.7.1 EN 60950-1 : 2001 EN 50360:2001/EN62209-1:2006 EN 301 511 V9.0.2 / EN 301 908-1 V3.2.1, EN 301 908-2 V3.2.1 The conformity to above standards is verified by the following Notified Body(BABT) BABT, Forsyth House, Churchfield Road, Walton-on-Thames, Surrey, KT12 2TD, United Kingdom Notified Body Identification Number : 0168 I hereby declare under our sole responsibility that the product mentioned above to which this declaration relates complies with the above mentioned standards and Directives 06. Oct. 2009 Guidelines for safe and efficient use Please read these simple guidelines. Not following these guidelines may be dangerous or illegal. Exposure to radio frequency energy Radio wave exposure and Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) information This mobile phone model GW550 has been designed to comply with applicable safety requirements for exposure to radio waves. These requirements are based on scientific guidelines that include safety margins designed to assure the safety of all persons, regardless of age and health. • The radio wave exposure guidelines employ a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate, or SAR. Tests for SAR are conducted using standardised methods with the phone transmitting at its highest certified power level in all used frequency bands. 88 • While there may be differences between the SAR levels of various LG phone models, they are all designed to meet the relevant guidelines for exposure to radio waves. • The SAR limit recommended by the International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection (ICNIRP) is 2W/kg averaged over 10g of tissue. • The highest SAR value for this model phone tested by DASY4 for use at the ear is 0.846 W/kg (10g) and when worn on the body is 1.34 W/Kg(10g). • SAR data information for residents in countries/regions that have adopted the SAR limit recommended by the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE), which is 1.6 W/kg averaged over 1g of tissue. Guidelines for safe and efficient use Product care and maintenance WARNING Only use batteries, chargers and accessories approved for use with this particular phone model. The use of any other types may invalidate any approval or warranty applying to the phone, and may be dangerous. • Do not disassemble this unit. Take it to a qualified service technician when repair work is required. • Keep away from electrical appliances such as TVs, radios, and personal computers. • The unit should be kept away from heat sources such as radiators or cookers. • Do not drop. • Do not subject this unit to mechanical vibration or shock. • Switch off the phone in any area where you are required by special regulations. For example, do not use your phone in hospitals as it may affect sensitive medical equipment. • Do not handle the phone with wet hands while it is being charged. It may cause an electric shock and can seriously damage your phone. • Do not charge a handset near flammable material as the handset can become hot and create a fire hazard. • Use a dry cloth to clean the exterior of the unit (do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner or alcohol). • Do not charge the phone when it is on soft furnishings. • The phone should be charged in a well ventilated area. • Do not subject this unit to excessive smoke or dust. 89 Guidelines for safe and efficient use • Do not keep the phone next to credit cards or transport tickets; it can affect the information on the magnetic strips. • Do not tap the screen with a sharp object as it may damage the phone. • Do not expose the phone to liquid, moisture or humidity • Use the accessories like earphones cautiously. Do not touch the antenna unnecessarily. • Do not use the phone or accessories in places with high humidity such as pools, greenhouses, solariums or tropical environments, it may cause damage to the phone and invalidation of warranty. 90 Efficient phone operation Electronics devices All mobile phones may get interference, which could affect performance. • Do not use your mobile phone near medical equipment without requesting permission. Avoid placing the phone over pacemakers, for example, in your breast pocket. • Some hearing aids might be disturbed by mobile phones. • Minor interference may affect TVs, radios, PCs, etc. Road safety Check the laws and regulations on the use of mobile phones in the area when you drive. • Do not use a hand-held phone while driving. • Give full attention to driving. • Use a hands-free kit, if available. • Pull off the road and park before making or answering a call if driving conditions so require. Guidelines for safe and efficient use • RF energy may affect some electronic systems in your vehicle such as car stereos and safety equipment. • When your vehicle is equipped with an air bag, do not obstruct with installed or portable wireless equipment. It can cause the air bag to fail or cause serious injury due to improper performance. • If you are listening to music whilst out and about, please ensure that the volume is at a reasonable level so that you are aware of your surroundings. This is particularly imperative when near roads. Glass Parts Some parts of your mobile device are made of glass. This glass could break if your mobile device is dropped on a hard surface or receives a substantial impact. If the glass breaks, do not touch or attempt to remove. Stop using your mobile device until the glass is replaced by an authorized service provider. Blasting area Do not use the phone where blasting is in progress. Observe restrictions, and follow any regulations or rules. Avoid damage to your hearing Damage to your hearing can occur if you are exposed to loud sound for long periods of time. We therefore recommend that you do not turn on or off the handset close to your ear. We also recommend that music and call volumes are set to a reasonable level. 91 Guidelines for safe and efficient use Potentially explosive atmospheres • Do not use the phone at a refueling point. • Do not use near fuel or chemicals. • Do not transport or store flammable gas, liquid, or explosives in the same compartment of your vehicle as your mobile phone and accessories. In aircraft Wireless devices can cause interference in aircraft. • Turn your mobile phone off before boarding any aircraft. • Do not use it on the ground without permission from the crew. Children Keep the phone in a safe place out of the reach of small children. It includes small parts which may cause a choking hazard if detached. 92 Emergency calls Emergency calls may not be available under all mobile networks. Therefore, you should never depend solely on the phone for emergency calls. Check with your local service provider. Battery information and care • You do not need to completely discharge the battery before recharging. Unlike other battery systems, there is no memory effect that could compromise the battery’s performance. • Use only LG batteries and chargers. LG chargers are designed to maximize the battery life. • Do not disassemble or short-circuit the battery pack. • Keep the metal contacts of the battery pack clean. Guidelines for safe and efficient use • Replace the battery when it no longer provides acceptable performance. The battery pack maybe recharged hundreds of times until it needs replacing. • Recharge the battery if it has not been used for a long time to maximize usability. • Do not expose the battery charger to direct sunlight or use it in high humidity, such as in the bathroom. • Do not leave the battery in hot or cold places, this may deteriorate the battery performance. • There is risk of explosion if the battery is replaced by an incorrect type. • Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer’s instructions. Please recycle when possible. Do not dispose as household waste. • If you need to replace the battery, take it to the nearest authorized LG Electronics service point or dealer for assistance. • Always unplug the charger from the wall socket after the phone is fully charged to save unnecessary power consumption of the charger. • Actual battery life will depend on network configuration, product settings, usage patterns, battery and environmental conditions. 93 Trouble shooting This chapter lists some problems you might encounter while using your phone. Some problems require you to call your service provider, but most are easy for you to correct yourself. Message Possible causes Possible Solutions SIM error There is no SIM card in the phone or it is inserted incorrectly. Make sure the SIM card is correctly inserted. No network connection Signal weak Outside GSM network area Move towards a window or into an open area. Check the service provider coverage map. Codes do not match To change a security code, you will need to confirm the new code by entering it again. The two codes you have entered do not match. Contact your Service Provider. Function cannot be set Not supported by Service Provider, or registration required Contact your Service Provider. Calls not available Dialling error New SIM card inserted Charge limit reached New network not authorised. Check for new restrictions. Contact Service Provider or reset limit with PIN 2. On/Off key not pressed long enough Battery flat Press the On/Off key down for at least two seconds. Charge battery. Check the charging indicator on the display. Clean the contacts. Phone cannot be switched on Battery contacts dirty 94 Message Possible causes Possible Solutions Battery totally empty Temperature out of range Charge battery. Make sure the ambient temperature is right, wait for a while, and then charge again. Check the power supply and connection to the phone. Check the battery contacts and clean them if necessary. Plug in to a different socket or check the voltage. If the charger does not warm up, replace it. Only use original LG accessories. Replace battery. Contact problem Charging error No mains voltage Charger defective Wrong charger Battery defective Phone loses network Signal too weak Reconnection to another service provider is automatic. Number not permitted The Fixed dial number function is on. Check settings. 95 ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ ،ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ً ﻗﻠﻴﻼ ،ﺛﻢ ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ. ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ .ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻼﻣﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ،ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻔﻬﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻗﺘﻀﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ. ﻻ ﻓﻮﻟﺘﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﻟﺘﻴﺔ. ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺧﻠﻞ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺴﺨﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ،ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻟﻪ. ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ LGﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ. ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ. ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻳﻨﻘﻄﻊ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ ﺟﺪﺍً ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً. ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﻪ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ. ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ. ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ 92 ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ ﻳﺴﺮﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺼﺎﺩﻓﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ .ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ،ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻣﻌﻈﻤﻬﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ً ﺳﻬﻼ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺤﻪ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ. ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ SIM ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SIMﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺩﺭﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ. ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SIMﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ. ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ GSM ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺡ .ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ّ ﺧﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺰﻭﺩﻙ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ. ﻻ ﺗﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ،ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ .ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﺘﻬﻤﺎ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻄﺎﺑﻘﺎﻥ. ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ. ّ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻣﻦ ِﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ،ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ. ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ. ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﻢ ﺑﻠﻮﻍ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SIMﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ. ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺼﺮﺡ ﻟﻬﺎ .ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻮﺩ ّ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ .ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ .PIN 2 ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ. ّ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻼﻣﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺘﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ. ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﻼﻣﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ. 91 ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻭ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ • ﻟﺴﺖ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻓﺮﺍﻍ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ .ﻭﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ،ﻟﻴﺲ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻪ ﺗﺨﻔﻴﺾ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ. • ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺷﻮﺍﺣﻦ LGﻓﻘﻂ. ﻓﺸﻮﺍﺣﻦ LGﻣﺼﻤّﻤﺔ ﻹﻃﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ. • ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﻜﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﻬﺎ ﻟﺤﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ. ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ • ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻈﺎﻓﺔ ّ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ. • ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺃﺩﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻘﺒﻮﻝ .ﻗﺪ ﻳﻌﺎﺩ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺕ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ. • ﺃﻋﺪ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻮﻗﻔﺖ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺻﻼﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ. ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻨﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ •ﻻ ّ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ،ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻡ. • ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺧﻨﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺩﺓ ،ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ. 90 • ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ،ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ. • ﺗﺨﻠّﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﺔ ﻃﺒﻘﺎً ﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨّﻌﺔ .ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻤﻜﻨﺎً .ﻻ ﺗﺘﺨﻠّﺺ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﻬﻤﻼﺕ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ. • ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ،ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺄﺧﺬﻫﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻓﺮﻉ ﻟﻠﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻭﻛﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻣﻦ LG Electronicsﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ. • ﻗﻢ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎً ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ. • ﺇﻥ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ،ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ،ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻘﻮﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ،ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ. ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻭ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺓ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻣﺼﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺝ .ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﻜﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺝ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺻﻠﺐ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻘﻰ ﺿﺮﺑﺔ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ .ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﻜﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺝ ،ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺴﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻪ. ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻟﻪ ﻣﻦ ِﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ. ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻄﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺴﺒّﺐ ﺑﺤﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺓ. • ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻃﺎﺋﺮﺓ. • ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻣﻦ ِﻗﺒﻞ ﻃﺎﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺓ. ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺗﻔﺠﻴﺮ ﺃﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺠﻴﺮ ﺟﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻴﻮﺩ ،ﻭﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻷﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ. ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺁﻣﻦ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺍً ﻋﻦ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ .ﻓﻬﻮ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻭﺗﺘﺴﺒّﺐ ﺑﺎﻻﺧﺘﻨﺎﻕ. ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺗ ّﺘﺴﻢ ﺃﺟﻮﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻼﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺍﺭﺉ • ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻗﻮﺩ. • ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﻮﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻴﻤﻴﺎﺋﻴﺔ. • ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻨﻘﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻏﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻼﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ ،ﺃﻭ ﻣﺘﻔﺠﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺠﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻭﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺗﻪ. ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺍﺭﺉ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ .ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺃﻻ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺍﺭﺉ .ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ. 89 ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻭ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻌّﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ، ﻗﺪ ّ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺩﺍﺋﻬﺎ. • ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻃﻠﺐ ﺍﻹﺫﻥ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ .ﺗﺠﻨّﺐ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﺒﺾ ،ﻣﺜﻼ ،ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻴﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﺭ. • ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺒّﺐ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﺯﻋﺎﺝ ﻟﻸﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺴﻤﻊ. • ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ،ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ،ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ. ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻗﺎﺕ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﻭﺍﻷﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ. • ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﺎً ً ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻻ ﺑﺎﻟﻴﺪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ. • ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺩﻭﻣﺎً ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ. • ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻻ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺔ ،ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ. 88 • ّ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺘﺪﻋﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ. • ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ RFﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ. • ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻜﻴﺲ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ، ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﻋﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ .ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺒﻄﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻴﺲ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺈﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺧﻄﻴﺮﺓ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺃﺩﺍء ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ. • ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﻤﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻨﻘﻠﻚ، ً ﻣﻌﻘﻮﻻ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻓﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺪﺭﻛﺎً ﻟﻤﺎ ﻳﺤﻴﻂ ﺑﻚ .ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻣﻠﺰﻣﺎً ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻗﺎﺕ. ّ ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﺑﺴﻤﻌﻚ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ّ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﺑﺴﻤﻌﻚ. ﻭﻧﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺄﻻ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻪ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺎً ﻣﻦ ﺃﺫﻧﻚ .ﻛﻤﺎ ﻧﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﻌﻘﻮﻝ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ. ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻭ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ • ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻔﻜﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ .ﺍﻋﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﻨﻲ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﺆﻫﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻹﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ. • ﺿﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﻌﻴﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ،ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ، ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ. • ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﺑﻘﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻓﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ. • ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺇﺳﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ. ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻼﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ •ﻻ ّ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ. • ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺗﻄﺎﻟﺒﻚ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ .ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ،ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﺇﺫ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﺔ. • ﻻ ﺗﻤﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻴﺪﻳﻦ ﺭﻃﺒﺘﻴﻦ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺷﺤﻨﻪ ﺟﺎﺭ .ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒّﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﺤﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺿﺮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻎ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ. • ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ ﺇﺫ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺳﺎﺧﻨﺎً ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﺪﻻﻉ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ. • ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ )ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻣﺬﻳﺒﺔ ﻛﺎﻟﺒﻨﺰﻳﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﻨﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺤﻮﻝ(. • ﻻ ﺗﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺛﺎﺙ ﻧﺎﻋﻢ. • ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﺔ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ. ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ •ﻻ ّ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪ. • ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺋﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺬﺍﻛﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ؛ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ. • ﻻ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺷﻲء ﺣﺎﺩ ﺇﺫ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ. ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻟﻠﺴﻮﺍﺋﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ. •ﻻ ّ • ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻛﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ ً ﻣﺜﻼ ﺑﺤﺬﺭ .ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺳﺒﺐ ﻳﺪﻋﻮﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ. • ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺗﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺟﺪﺍً ﻣﺜﻞ ﺃﺣﻮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺎﺣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺟﻴﺔ ﻟﺰﺭﺍﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺒﺎﺗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻑ ّ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻮﺍﺋﻴﺔ ،ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺇﺑﻄﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ. 87 ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻭ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻄﺔ .ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻴﺪ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻣﺮﺍً ﺧﻄﺮﺍً ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ. ﺍﻟﺘﻌ ّﺮﺽ ﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ّ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻻﻣﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ) .(SARﻟﻘﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ GW550 ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻔﻲ ﺑﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ .ﻭﺗﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ّ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺗﺘﻀﻤّﻦ ﻫﻮﺍﻣﺶ ﺳﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﺼﻤّﻤﺔ ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ،ﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﺑﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ. ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ • ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ّ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻓﺔ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻻﻣﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ،ﺃﻭ .SARﻭﺗﺠﺮﻱ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ SARﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﺄﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﻫﺎ. • ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻓﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ SARﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻃﺮﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ،LGﻓﻬﻲ ﻛﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺼﻤﻤﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ ّ 86ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ. • ﺣﺪ SARﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﻠﺠﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻳﻦ ﻣﻘﺴﻢ ) (ICNIRPﻫﻮ 2ﻭﺍﻁ/ﻛﻎ ﻭﻫﻮ ﺣﺪ ّ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺇﻟﻰ 10ﻏﺮﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﻴﺞ. • ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ SARﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ DASY4 ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ 0.846ﻭﺍﻁ/ﻛﻎ )10 ﻏﺮﺍﻡ( ،ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﺪ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ 1.34 ﻭﺍﻁ/ﻛﻎ ) 10ﻏﺮﺍﻡ(. • ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ SARﻟﻠﻤﻘﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻠﺪﺍﻥ/ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺗﺘﺒﻨﻰ ﺣﺪ SARﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻦ ِﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﻌﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻨﺪﺳﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﻴﻦ ) (IEEEﻫﻮ 1.6ﻭﺍﻁ/ﻛﻎ ﻛﻤﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻏﺮﺍﻡ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ) (1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﻴﺞ. ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺻﻴﺎﻧﺘﻪ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﻮﺍﺣﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴّﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ .ﺇﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺑﻄﺎﻝ ﺃﻱ ﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﺗﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ،ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺧﻄﻴﺮﺍً. GSM 850 / E-GSM 900 / DCS 1800 / PCS 1900 Quad Band and WCDMA Terminal Equipment GW550 / GW550h EN 301 489-01 v1.6.1 / EN 301 489-07 v1.3.1 / EN 301 489-17 v.1.2.1 / EN 301 489-19 v1.2.1 / EN 301 489-24 V1.4.1 EN 300 328 V 1.7.1 EN 60950-1 : 2001 EN 50360:2001/EN62209-1:2006 EN 301 511 V9.0.2 / EN 301 908-1 V3.2.1, EN 301 908-2 V3.2.1 The conformity to above standards is verified by the following Notified Body(BABT) BABT, Forsyth House, Churchfield Road, Walton-on-Thames, Surrey, KT12 2TD, United Kingdom Notified Body Identification Number : 0168 I hereby declare under our sole responsibility that the product mentioned above to which this declaration relates complies with the above mentioned standards and Directives 06. Oct. 2009 ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻊ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯﻙ. ﻛﻴﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ) ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ( ّ ǠŮǍŸ ENGLISH ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ GW550 www.lgmobile.com )P/N : MMBB0359220 (1.0 ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ aﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ LGﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎً. aﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺑﻄﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ. aﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ :ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻭﻛﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻔﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ. 84 ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻷﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ. .1ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ < ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ < ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ. .2ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍً ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ: aﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ :ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ. aﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ :ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﺟﺪ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ. aﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻴﺮ :ﺣﺪﺩ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ. aﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ :ﺣﺪﺩ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻷﺑﺠﺪﻱ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ. aﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ :ﺣﺪﺩ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ. aﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺐ :ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻱ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﺭﻣﺰ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻭﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺒﺔ. aﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺒﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺒﺔ :ﺣﺪﺩ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﺔ ﻭﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻱ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﺭﻣﺰ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻭﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺒﺔ. .3ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻢ. ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺋﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﻴﻦ. aﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ < ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ < ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤُﺪﺍﺭﺓ. ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ،ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ. ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤُﺪﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤُﺪﺍﺭﺓ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ. aﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ < ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ < ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤُﺪﺍﺭﺓ. 83 ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ PIN ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺡ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻏﻴﺮ ّ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻳﺴﻤﻰ ) PINﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ( .ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ PINﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ؛ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻻﺣﻖ. aﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ < ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ < ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ < ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ .SIM PIN ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ aﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ < ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ < ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ < ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ .SIM PIN ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻟﻚ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﻜﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ّ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻧﻪ. aﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ < ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ < ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻟﻚ. ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ،ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒّﺘﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ. aﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ < ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ < ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ. 82 ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ. .1ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ < ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ < ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ. .2ﻋﻴّﻦ ﻣﻬﻠﺔ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ. .3ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻢ. ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻠﺔ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ. .1ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ < ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ < ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ. .2ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍً: aﺣﺠﻢ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ :ﺣﺪﺩ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. aﻣﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ :ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻠﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ. aﻣﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ :ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻠﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ. aﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ :ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ. .3ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻢ. ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ .1ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ < ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ < ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ. .2ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ. .3ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ .ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ،ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ .61 ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ .1ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ < ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ < ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ. .2ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ. .3ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ. ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺃﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺗﻚ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﺑﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ. .1ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ < ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ < ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ < ﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ. .2ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺑﻊ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ، ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻃﻠﺐ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ. .3ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ. .4ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪﻫﺎ. .5ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻢ. ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ aﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ،ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺒﺘﻚ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻠﻪ. 81 ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ aﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﺎﻡ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ Wi-Fiﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ WEPﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ،ﻓﻌﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﻌﺒﺌﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ WEPﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻖ .ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮ ،ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻖ ﻫﺬﺍ .ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺠﻬﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ،ﻓﻌﻠﻴﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺄﻝ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ Wi- Fiﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ. .6ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ،ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻢ. .7ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ،Wi-Fiﻓﺴﺘﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ) (SSIDﻓﻲ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ. .8ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ،Wi-Fiﺣﺪﺩ Wi-Fiﻓﻲ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ. .1ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ < ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ < ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ. .2ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ < Wi-Fiﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ. .3ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻭﺗﻔﻀﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ. .4ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻢ. ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ Wi-Fi ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ aﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ،WLANﺳﺘﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻔﺴﺎﺭ ﻟﺪﻯ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ WLANﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ .IP 80 ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ! ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺮﺩﺩﺍً ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﻖ ﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻴﺔ. ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ WLANﻓﻲ ﺑﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻻﺗﺤﺎﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﻱ ﻗﻴﺪ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺮﻧﺴﺎ. ﻟﻠﺘﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ WLAN .1ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ < ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ < ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ. .2ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ .Wi-Fiﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ Wi-Fiﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻭﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎ. bﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ Wi-Fiﺟﺪﻳﺪ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ. bﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ،Wi-Fiﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ. ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﻳﻮﻡ ﺍﻷﺳﺒﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ. .1ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ. .2ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ .ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ. .3ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ. .4ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻢ. ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ Wi-Fiﻭﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ. ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ .1ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ 1ﺃﻭ ،2ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ. .2ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ ،ﻭﺗﺮﺩﺩﻩ ﻭﺻﻮﺗﻪ ﻭﻧﻮﻋﻪ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺗﻪ. .3ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻢ. ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ Wi-Fiﻭﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻔﻲ ﻭ GPRSﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ. ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ aﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻭﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ .Wi-Fi ﻳُﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺸ ّﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ. Wi-Fi .1ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ < ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ < ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ. .2ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ،Wi-Fiﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ. .3ﻳﺴﺄﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﻥ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻌﻢ. .4ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ. .5ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ. 79 ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ .ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻋﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺩﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﻄﺔ ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ. ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ .1ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ < ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ. .2ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ: aﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻘﺔ :ﻫﺬﻩ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ. aﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻘﺔ :ﺣﺪﺩ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ. Windows Simplea Windows Defaulta aﺧﻂ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ Windows Basica :Windows Live Defaultaﺣﺪﺩ ﻟﺘﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ Windows Live searchﻭﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ Windows Liveﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ. .3ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﻓﺘﺤﻬﺎ ﺣﺪﻳﺜﺎً ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺪء، ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﻳﺜﺔ. .4ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻢ. 78 ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺻﻮﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ. .1ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ < ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ. .2ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺑﻊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻛﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ. .3ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻢ. ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﻘﻰ ﺧﻼﻟﻬﺎ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ: .1ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ < ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ. .2ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻠﺔ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻠﺔ. .3ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻢ. ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺘﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺘﻴﻦ: aﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ. aﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ < ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ. ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ aﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ :ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ. aﺍﻟﺘﺬﻛﻴﺮﺍﺕ :ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻟﻠﺘﺬﻛﻴﺮ. aﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ :ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ. aﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ :ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ. aﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ :ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ. aﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ :ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ. aﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ :ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ. aﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ :SIMﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ .SIM aﺍﻹﺧﻄﺎﺭﺍﺕ :ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ. aﺍﻟﺴﺆﺍﻝ :ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺆﺍﻝ. aﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮﺍﺕ :ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ. aﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ :ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ. ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺗﺼﺤﺐ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺧﻤﺴﺔ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻣﻌﻴّﻨﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً .ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ ﻭﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻭﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﻴﻦ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ. ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .1ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ. .2ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ. .3ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ. .4ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻢ. ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﻂ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ. ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ. 77 ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﻼﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻧﺸﻐﺎﻟﻚ ﺑﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ، ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻢ. ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ،ﻣﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ )ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻀﻊ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ( .ﺣﺪﺩ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ. ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻪ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ .ﺣﺪﺩ ﻻ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻹﺧﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ. ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮّﻓﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً ﻣﻌﺮّﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ. ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﻘﻴﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﻴّﻨﺔ. ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ. ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ. ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮ ،ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ. bﻳﺪﻭﻱ :ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ. bﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ :ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً. 76 ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻳﺘﻀﻤّﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ّ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ّ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ. ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﺮّﻓﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً ،ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ. .1ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ ّ .2ﻋ ّﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ. .3ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺣﻔﻆ. ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ. ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ،ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ،ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻓﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ. ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻼﻣﻬﺎ. ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻼ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ .ﻻ ﻳﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ. ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ. ﺣﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﻟﻠﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ: aﺣﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ :ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ/ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻮﺍﻝ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ. aﺣﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ :ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ/ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ/ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ. ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﻈﺮ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ .ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﻈﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻮﺭ ﺍﻻﺷﺘﺮﺍﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ. ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺣﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ،ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺍﺭﺉ. ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺁﺧﺮ. ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ: aﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺄﻱ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ :ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺑﻊ ﻟﻺﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺑﻀﻐﻂ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ. aﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ :SIMﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺑﻊ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ .SIM aﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ :ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ .ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ. aﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ :ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ .ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ. aﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ :ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻚ. aﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ :ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻚ. 75 ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ XT9 ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ .1ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ < XT9 ﻗﻮﺍﻣﻴﺲ .XT9 .2ﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺗﻲ ،XT9ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ. .3ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ،ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺣﺬﻑ. .4ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺗﻲ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ .ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻌﻢ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ. .1ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ < XT9 ﻗﻮﺍﻣﻴﺲ .XT9 .2ﺣﺪﺩ XT9ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ. .3ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ،ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺣﺬﻑ. ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ .1ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ < XT9 ﻗﻮﺍﻣﻴﺲ .XT9 .2ﺣﺪﺩ XT9ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ. .3ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ. .4ﺍﻛﺘﺐ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺼﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﻬﺎ ،ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻢ. ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ .1ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ < XT9 ﻗﻮﺍﻣﻴﺲ .XT9 .2ﺣﺪﺩ XT9ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ. .3ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ ،ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ. .4ﺍﻛﺘﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺼﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﻬﺎ ،ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻢ. 74 ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ XT9 ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ XT9ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻣﻮﺱ ﻭﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺘﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ. .1ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ < XT9 ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ .XT9 .2ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ .ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻫﻲ :ﺍﻹﻧﺠﻠﻴﺰﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻐﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﺳﺒﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺮﻧﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﻳﻄﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ. .3ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻣﻮﺱ ﺑﺒﺪء ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ. .4ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ. .5ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻢ. ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻗﻮﺍﻣﻴﺲ XT9 ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻗﻮﺍﻣﻴﺲ XT9ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﻣﻮﺱ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺗﻲ .XT9ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ. ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺑﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻪ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ. .1ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ. .2ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء .ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ) HH.MM.SS.hhﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﻣﻦ ﻣﺎﺋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ(. .3ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ،ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺓ .ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ .ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ 99ﻭﻗﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﻛﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ. .4ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ. .5ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ. ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ XT9 ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ،ﺗﻢ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ Windowsﻣﺜﻞ Bubble BreakerﻭSolitaire ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ. aﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ،ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ. .1ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ < XT9 ﻗﻮﺍﻣﻴﺲ .XT9 .2ﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺗﻲ ،XT9ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ. .3ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ ،ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ. .4ﺍﻛﺘﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻣﻮﺱ، ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻢ. ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ XT9 .1ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ < XT9 ﻗﻮﺍﻣﻴﺲ .XT9 .2ﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺗﻲ ،XT9ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ. .3ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ. .4ﺍﻛﺘﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻣﻮﺱ، ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻢ. .5ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺗﻲ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺇﻧﻬﺎء. 73 ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﺬﻛﻴﺮ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻟﻜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻣﻬﻤﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺬﻛﻴﺮ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺋﻬﺎ. .1ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ. .2ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ. .3ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺬﻛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ. .4ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻢ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ. ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ،ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺮﺯﻫﺎ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻬﻤﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ. .1ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ. .2ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡّ ،ﻧﻔﺬ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ: aﻓﺮﺯ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ .ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﻓﺮﺯ ﺑﺤﺴﺐ ،ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺯ. aﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺼﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ .ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻔﻴﺔ ،ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ. aﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﻮﺍﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﺳﺘﺤﻘﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻣﻌﻴّﻨﺔ ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺬﻛﻴﺮ ﺣﻴّﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ. ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻹﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺨﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﺤﻘﺎﻕ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ .1ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ. .2ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ. .3ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺨﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﺤﻘﺎﻕ. .4ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻢ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ. 72 aﻟﺘﺼﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻔﻴﺔ < ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﻄﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﻤﻠﺔ. ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻭﻃﺮﺡ ﻭﺿﺮﺏ ﻭﻗﺴﻤﺔ .ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻭﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ. aﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ < ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ. ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ .1ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ. .2ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ. .3ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﻣﻮﻋﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ. .4ﺍﻛﺘﺐ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﻭﻣﻮﻗﻌﻪ ﺛﻢ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ. .5ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ. .6ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺔ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻢ. ﻟﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ .1ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ. .2ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ /ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺳﺒﻮﻉ / ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺮ /ﻋﺮﺽ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ. ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ّ ﻟﺘﻌﻘﺐ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ .ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ )ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ(. ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﺬﻛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻟﻤﻬﺎﻣﻚ ﻭﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺎﺕ. ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻬﺎﻣﻚ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻬﺎﻡ .ﻭﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺄﺧﺮ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ. ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﻬﻤﺔ .1ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﻣﻬﺎﻡ. .2ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﻣﻬﻤﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ. .3ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎً ﻟﻠﻤﻬﻤﺔ ،ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﺒﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻮﺍﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﺤﻘﺎﻕ ﻭﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻭﻏﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ. .4ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻢ. ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ aﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﻬﻤﺔ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ .ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻬﻤﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻫﻨﺎ. ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺑﻔﺮﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺘﻬﺎ ،ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻬﻤﺔ. .1ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﻣﻬﺎﻡ. .2ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ،ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ. .3ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ. .4ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻢ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ. ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ aﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ. 71 ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ aﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ،ﻓﺤﺪﺩ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺘﻴﻦ. aﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ، ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ. aﺣﺪﺩ ﻓﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ )ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺎً ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺗﻲ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ. ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺗﻚ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ. ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ .1ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ. .2ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ. .3ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ .ﻳُﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﺑﺎﺳﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ. . .4ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ .1ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ. .2ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ. 70 ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ .1ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ. .2ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. .3ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ. .4ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ،ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻢ. ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻛﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺭﻧﻴﻦ .1ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ. .2ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺭﻧﻴﻦ. ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ .1ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ. .2ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﺬﻓﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. .3ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺣﺬﻑ. ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻣﻮﺟﺰﺍﺕ ﻭﻳﺐ ﻟـ RSS .1ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ .ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ /ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ. .2ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ. ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻮﺟﺰﺍﺕ ﻭﻳﺐ ﻟـ RSS .1ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﺮﺽ. .2ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺧﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. .3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﺔ. .4ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺰ ﺍﻹﺧﺒﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ. .5ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺰ ﺍﻹﺧﺒﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ،Internet Explorerﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﻓﺘﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ .IE .6ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ. .7ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ. ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ aﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ. Live Search Widget ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ Live Search Widgetﺑﺎﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ .Live Searchﻭﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﻧﻘﺮﺓ ﺯﺭ ،ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ Live Searchﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ. aﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < .Search Widget ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ aﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ،Live Search Widget ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ GPRS SIMﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ. aﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ. ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﻣﻤﺎﺛﻞ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻳﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻜﺘﺐ .Windowsﻭﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ. ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺑﺈﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ، ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ. ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ،ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ. 69 ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ Microsoft My Phone ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ Microsoft® My Phoneﺑﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻣﻊ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ My Phoneﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ http://myphone. .microsoft.com ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻜﺘﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ Windows XP Professionalﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ .ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ،ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً ﻣﺜﻼ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻟﻮ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺍً ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺘﺒﻚ. aﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ. ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ My Phone .1ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < Microsoft My .Phone .2ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ. .3ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺧﻴﺺ ،ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ. ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ،Windows Live IDﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ّ .4 ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ. .5ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ :ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ،ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ. .6ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ. ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ aﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ،Microsoft My Phone ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ GPRS SIMﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ. 68 ﻋﺎﺭﺽ RSS ﻋﺎﺭﺽ RSSﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻻﺷﺘﺮﺍﻙ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺟﺰﺍﺕ ﻭﻳﺐ ﻟـ RSSﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ. ﻟﻼﺷﺘﺮﺍﻙ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺟﺰﺍﺕ ﻭﻳﺐ ﻟـ RSS .1ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﻋﺎﺭﺽ .RSS .2ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ. .3ﺃﺩﺧﻞ URLﻭﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ، ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻢ. ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ Java aﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ،MSN Weatherﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ GPRS SIMﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ. ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ Javaﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ Javaﻭﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ Javaﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ. aﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ. ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ GPSExtra ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ GPSﻭﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺃﺩﺍء .GPS ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ aﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ،GPSExtraﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ GPRS SIMﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ. aﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ. ﺿﺒﻂ AGPS aﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ. Marketplace Windows® Marketplace for mobile ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺳﻮﻕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﻭﻳﺐ. aﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < .Marketplace ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ aﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ،Marketplaceﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ GPRS SIMﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ. aﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ. ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ AGPSﻟﺘﻘﺼﻴﺮ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ GPSﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻬﺎ. 67 ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ Adobe Reader LE Adobe Reader® LEﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ PDF (Portable Document ) Formatﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ. ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻣﻠﻒ PDF .1ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < Adobe Reader .LE ً ﻭﺻﻮﻻ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ PDFﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ .2ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﺘﺤﻪ ،ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻓﺘﺢ. .3ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ/ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ < ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ/ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ. .4ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺇﻧﻬﺎء. ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ،ﺗُﻐﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ،ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎً ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ. .1ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ < ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ. .2ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ).(CPU .3ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎً ﺑﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﺔ. .4ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ. 66 .5ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺮﺯ ﺑﺤﺴﺐ. .6ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺇﻧﻬﺎء. MSN Money ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ MSN Money ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺳﻮﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ. ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ aﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ،MSN Moneyﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ GPRS SIMﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ. aﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ. MSN Weather ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺗﻮﻗﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﻘﺲ ﻣﻦ .MSN Weather ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ • ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ aﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ .ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻤﻜﻦ Word Mobile ﻣﻦ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺺ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ،ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺩﺋﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻬﻤﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ. aﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ .ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ Word Mobileﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ. ﻳﺠﺐ ً ﺃﻭﻻ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ Word ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ. aﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ .ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ Word Mobileﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ Wordﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ. ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ .Word Mobile aﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﻳﺔ aﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ .ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻔﺘﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍً ﻳﺘﻀﻤّﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ،Word Mobileﻳﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻭﻛﺄﻥ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﻗﺒﻮﻟﻬﺎ. ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻓﻲ ،Word Mobileﺗُﻔﻘﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ. aﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ .ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﻔﻆ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍً ﻓﻲ Word ،Mobileﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻪ. aﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻄﻴﺮ .ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻄﻴﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ Word Mobileﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ :ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ،ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﻘﻂ ,ﺃﻭ ﻣﻤﻮﺝ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻤﻴﻚ/ﻏﺎﻣﻖ/ﻋﺮﻳﺾ. aﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ .Legacy Pocket Wordﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ * psw.ﻓﻲ Word Mobile؛ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ،ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻌﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺣﻔﻈﻪ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ * doc.ﺃﻭ * rtf.ﺃﻭ * txt.ﺃﻭ *.dot. ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ؛ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ. aﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺷﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺘﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻭﺭﺅﻭﺱ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﺬﻳﻴﻼﺗﻬﺎ. aﻓﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ :ﻻ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ Word Mobile ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ .ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﻓﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ ﻓﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ. aﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ :ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ، ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺩﺋﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ. aﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﻭﺃﺣﺠﺎﻣﻬﺎ .ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ. 65 ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻟﺒﺪء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ/ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ .1ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < Office Mobile < .PowerPoint Mobile .2ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ،ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ. ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻤﻲ ﻛﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً. .1ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < Office Mobile < .PowerPoint Mobile .2ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻤﻲ. .3ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ. ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ • ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ PowerPoint Mobileﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻤﻲ، ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء. ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻤﻲ ﻛﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ،ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ،ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺷﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ. .1ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < Office Mobile < .PowerPoint Mobile .2ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ. .3ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ. ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! aﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ. 64 Word Mobile Word Mobileﻫﻮ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻦ .Microsoft Wordﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ Word ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ *.docﻭ *.rtfﻭ*.txt ﻭ.*.dot ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ .ﻭﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺁﺧﺮ ،ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ. ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻐﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ ،ﺳﻴﻄﺎﻟﺒﻚ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﺑﺤﻔﻈﻪ. ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ ،ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻞ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻭﻧﻘﻠﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ. ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ Word Mobileﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ Microsoft Wordﻣﺜﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻭﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ .ﻗﺪ ﺗُﻔﻘﺪ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ. ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ .Word Mobile • ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺎﺕ • ﺍﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﻭﻣﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ • ﺍﻟﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ • ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ OneNote Mobile PowerPoint Mobile ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ OneNote Mobileﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﻣﻀﺎﻓﺔ. ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ،PowerPoint Mobileﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺃﻧﺸﺄﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ *.pptﻭ *.ppsﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ PowerPoint ‘97ﻭﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻻﺣﻖ. ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ .ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻤﻲ ﻛﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ،ﻓﺴﺘﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً .ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ URLﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ً ﺃﻳﻀﺎ. ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ PowerPointﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ: aﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ .ﻟﻦ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ. aﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎPowerPoint . Mobileﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻘﻂ. aﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ .ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ *.pptﻳﺴﺒﻖ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ PowerPoint ‘97ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ HTMLﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ *.htmﻭ *.mhtﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ. ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ .1ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < Office Mobile < .OneNote Mobile .2ﺣﺪﺩ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ. .3ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺘﻚ. .4ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻢ. ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. aﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ :ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ. aﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ :ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ. aﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ :ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ. aﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ :ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ. aﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ :ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ. 63 ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ aﺍﻟﺼﻴﻎ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ .ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺣﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻠﻒ Excel ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻤﻬﺎ ،Excel Mobileﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ،ﻭﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ .ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻎ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻢ :ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻛﺼﻔﻴﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻭﺳﻴﻄﺔ ﺻﻔﻴﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝSUM({1= ،؛2؛3؛({4؛ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ؛ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻴﻎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻭﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﺼﻒ 16384ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻟﻬﺎ ﺑـ !REF# aﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ .ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ. ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ .ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ .ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ Excel ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺛﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ. aﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ/ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ .ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻬﺎ. ﻳﺪﻋﻢ Excelﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ/ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ .ﻟﻜﻞ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪﺓ ،ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ/ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ .ﻓﻲ Excel Mobileﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻒ ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻪ. aﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺃﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ .ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻒ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ،ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻔﻴﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ،ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ1}= ،؛2؛3؛ ،{4ﺃﻭ ﺻﻴﻎ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻴﻔﺎﺕ ،ﺃﻭ ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء .ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ، 62ﻓﺴﻴﺒﻘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻎ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺍﻻﺕ ،ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻎ ﻛـ ”? .“#NAMEﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺧﻔﺎء ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻔﻴﺔ. aﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ .ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ .ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺗﺼﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ Excel Mobile ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺑﻬﺔ .ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺗﺼﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺧﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻮﻑ ،ﺗﺒﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻮﻑ ﻣﺨﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ .Excel Mobileﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻔﻴﺔ. aﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻄﺎﺕ .ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻄﺎﺕ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ .Excel Mobile ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻄﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ :ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ،ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ,ﺧﻂ ,ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ,ﻣﺒﻌﺜﺮ, ﻭﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ .ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ،ﻭﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ،ﻭﺗﺴﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ،ﻭﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ، ﻭﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ ،ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ،ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻮﻳﺔ ،ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻳﻴﺲ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻏﺎﺭﻳﺘﻤﻴﺔ. aﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺃﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ .ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ Excel Mobileﻭﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻣﺼﻨﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ :ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻔﻴﺔ؛ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ،VBAﻭﺃﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻛﺮﻭ ،ﻭﺃﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺄﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻧﺎﺋﺒﺔ؛ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ،ﻭﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ،ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ،ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ،ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻃﻴﺔ، ﻭﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ؛ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﺍﻭﻝ pivot ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻢ. ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ Office Mobile Excel Mobile ﻳﺴﻬّﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ Excel Mobileﻓﺘﺢ ﻭﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺼﻨﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﻧﻤﺎﺫﺝ Excelﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺃﻧﺸﺄﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ. ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻣﻠﻒ Excel .1ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < Office Mobile < .Excel Mobile .2ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻣﻠﻒ ،Excelﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ. ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﺮﺽ. ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. aﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻣﻠﻒ :ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻭﺇﻧﻬﺎء .Excel Mobile aﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ :ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﻮﺡ. aﻣﻠﻒ :ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ )ﺣﻔﻆ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ( ،ﺃﻭ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻪ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ. aﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ :ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﻴّﻨﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﻣﻌﻴّﻦ. aﺑﺤﺚ :ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ )ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ( ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ. aﺣﻮﻝ :ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ. ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ Excel Mobile ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ Excel Mobileﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻎ ﻭﺗﻌﻠﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻳﺎ .ﻗﺪ ﺗُﻔﻘﺪ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ .ﻻﺣﻆ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ :Excel Mobile aﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ .ﺗﺒﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺕ ﺃﻓﻘﻴﺔ ﻭﻋﻤﻮﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﺃﻓﻘﻴﺎً. aﺍﻟﺤﺪﻭﺩ .ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻛﺨﻂ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ. aﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻳﺎ .ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻳﺎ. aﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﻭﺃﺣﺠﺎﻣﻬﺎ .ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ. ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ .ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻒ ﻓﻲ Excelﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺠﺪ ًﺩﺍ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﻂ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ. aﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ .ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻃﻲ ﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ Microsoft Excel 2007ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ 6.1 ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ. 61 ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ: aﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ :ﺣﺪﺩ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺷﺮﺍﻛﺔ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ. aﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ :ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ. :LG-Timesaﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺮﺍﻩ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ .ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ. aﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻜﺸﻒ/ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻜﺸﻒ :ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ. aﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ: ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ: aﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ :ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ )ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻭﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻝ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻌﻴﺪ(. aﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ :ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺈﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻼﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ. aﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﺋﻦ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ :BTﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺈﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﺋﻦ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻟـ Outlookﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ. • ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ :ﺣﺪﺩ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ. • ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻓﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻴﺔ :ﺣﺪﺩ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻨﺎﻓﺬ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻴﺔ. • ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ :ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ. • ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ :ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻼﻳﺪﻭﻱ. • ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎﺕ :ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻦ. 60 ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺗﻲ ﺗﺴﺮﺩ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺃﻧﺸﺄﺕ ﺷﺮﺍﻛﺔ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ. aﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ. aﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺣﺬﻑ. aﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ. ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺷﺮﺍﻛﺔ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻟﻘﺒﻮﻝ ﺷﺮﺍﻛﺔ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ .1ﻣﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ. .2ﻟﺘﻘﻴﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ. .1ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ. .2ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺒﺘﻚ ﺑﻪ )ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺮﺍﻛﺔ( ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺁﻣﻦ. .3ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ. aﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻭﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻧﻪ ً ﻗﺎﺑﻼ ﻟﻠﻜﺸﻒ. ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ .3ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ .ﻳﺒﺤﺚ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ. .4ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ،ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ. .5ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ،ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ. ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ aﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺪﺧﻠﻪ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ. ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ،ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻛﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻭﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻨﻪ. ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ .ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ. aﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ :ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ. aﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ :ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﻭﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ PIMﺃﺧﺮﻯ. aﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ :ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ. aﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺄﻟﻒ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ 16ﺣﺮﻓﺎً. 59 ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ً ﻗﺎﺑﻼ ﻟﻠﻜﺸﻒ .1ﻣﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻜﺸﻒ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ. .2ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ )ﻣﺮﺋﻲ ﺩﻭﻣﺎً ،ﻣﺮﺋﻲ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ 60 ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ،ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﺋﻲ(. .3ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻢ. ﺷﺮﺍﻛﺔ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ aﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ،ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء. aﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﻠﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺁﺧﺮ ،ﻳﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ .ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ،ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ. aﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺘﺮﻛﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ < ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ < ...ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ. 58 ﺷﺮﺍﻛﺔ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺁﻣﻨﺔ .ﻭﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﻛﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ) (PINﺃﻭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯﻳﻦ .ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺷﺮﺍﻛﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻳﻦ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻟﻤﺮﺓ ّ ﺳﻴﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯﺍﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ .ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﻛﺔ، ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﻛﺔ ﻭﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ّ PINﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ .ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﻦ 10ﺃﻣﺘﺎﺭ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺍﻵﺧﺮ ،ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻭﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻧﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻜﺸﻒ. ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ. aﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ Windows XP, Service Pack 2ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ. ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ aﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ 4.5ﻣﻦ ActiveSyncﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻻﺣﻖ. ﺻﻞ ﻛﻴﺒﻞ USBﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ. ِ .1 .2ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ. .3ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑـ USBﺃﻭ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ .PAN .4ﻋﻴّﻦ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ APNﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ. .5ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ. .6ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ) ( / / ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ PDPﺑﻨﺠﺎﺡ. ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ّ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﺳﻼﻙ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﺎ .ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ،ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻭﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺃﻣﺮﺍً ﻣﻤﻜﻨﺎً. ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ .1ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ. .2ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻌﻢ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ .ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ. 57 ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ 56 ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻌﻚ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮ ،ﻓﺴﻴﻌﻤﻞ ActiveSync ﻣﻊ Windows Media Playerﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ. ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻓﻲ ActiveSyncﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺘﻬﺎ ،ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻓﻲ Windows Media .Playerﻭﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ،ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ: aﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ Windows Media Playerﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ 10ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ. aﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﻴﺒﻞ .USB ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ، ﻓﻌﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ. aﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ )ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ 32ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ(. aﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭ .Windows Media Player ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻓﻲ ActiveSync ّ ﺳﺘﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺘﻬﺎ، ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ .Windows Media Playerﻛﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﻫﻮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ Windows Media Player ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺗﻠﻚ. ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ: .1ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ .Windows Media Player .2ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ .Sync .3ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ. .4ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ .Sync ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ Windows Media Playerﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ،ﺭﺍﺟﻊ Windows Media Playerﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ .59 ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ Exchange ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ Exchangeﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ،ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻚ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ .ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ،ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ً ﺃﻭﻻ ﻃﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺛﻢ ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ :ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻭﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ Exchangeﻭﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻭﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ. .1ﻓﻲ ActiveSyncﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺩﻡ .ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ،Exchangeﻓﺴﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ. .2ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ،ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ. .3ﻓﻲ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺩﻡ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ Exchangeﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ،ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺑﻊ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺩﻡ ﻳﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ )ّ (SSL ﻣﺸﻔﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ. .4ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ ،ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ .ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺤﻞ ﺗﻌﺎﺭﺿﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ. .5ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ .Exchange .6ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ. .7ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء. ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻠﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ. ﻟﻠﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ .1ﺣﺪﺩ ً ﺃﻭﻻ ﺧﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﺑﺎﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺑﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ActiveSync ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ. ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ COMﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ. ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ،ﻓﻌﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻗﺘﺮﺍﻥ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ. .2ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ. 55 ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ1 ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء Outlook ﻭﻣﻮﺍﻋﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ 2ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻵﻥ ً ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ.1 ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ2 ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء Outlook ﻭﻣﻮﺍﻋﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ 1ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻵﻥ ً ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ.2 ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء Outlook ﻭﻣﻮﺍﻋﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ 1ﻭﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ2 ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ. ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻬﺎ aﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ Outlookﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ،ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻴﺒﻞ. aﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺠﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ،Exchange Serverﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﻫﻮ ”Desktop ) “Pass-throughﺗﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ( ،ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺧﻠﻮﻳﺔ. 54 aﻓﻲ ،ActiveSyncﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ .ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻟﻬﺎ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ. aﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺘﻬﺎ .1ﻓﻲ ActiveSyncﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ. .2ﻗﻢ ﺑﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻼ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ: aﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻷﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺘﻬﺎ. ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ،ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻨﻔﺲ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. aﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻷﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺘﻬﺎ. .3ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﺎﻡ، ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺣﺬﻑ. ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ aﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻟـ Outlook ﻣﻊ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ .ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ. ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ aﻳﺒﺪﺃ Synchronization Setup Wizard )ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ( ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﻭﻳﺮﺷﺪﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ .ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ. aﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ،ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺧﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ Microsoft ،Exchange Serverﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ. aﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺘﻬﺎ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ. aﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء. ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺞ ،ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ActiveSyncﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً. ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ USB ﺃﻭ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ،ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ActiveSyncﺑﺎﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻝ. ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ،ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ActiveSyncﺑﺎﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ. ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ Outlook ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻗﺪ ﺃﻋﺪﺩﺕ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ،ﻓﺴﺘﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ Outlookﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ. ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ActiveSyncﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺎً ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ .ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺘﻬﺎ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ. ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻟﻠﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺰﻳﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺧﺎﺩﻡ .Exchangeﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ،ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ. ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ،ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻱ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )ﺟﻬﺎﺯ 1ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ،(2ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ،ﻭﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻼ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ،ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻛﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ: 53 ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ aﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺜﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ .Outlook aﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺘﻬﺎ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ. aﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ .ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ،ﻳﻘﻮﻡ Windows Mobile Device Centerﺑﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً .ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ Outlookﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ Windows Mobile Device Center ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ،Windows Mobile Device Center ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﺑﺪﺃ < ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ < Windows Mobile Device Centerﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ .Windows Vistaﻓﻲ Windows ،Mobile Device Centerﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ: aﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ. 52 aﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ < ___ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻛﻠﻴﺐ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ،ﻭﻳﻘﻮﺩﻙ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ .Windows Vista aﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ < ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻣﻦ Windows Media Playerﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ .Windows Media™ Player ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ،ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ Windows Media® Player Mobileﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ .112 aﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ < ﺗﺼﻔﺢ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ. ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ Windows XP ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ،Windows XPﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ActiveSyncﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ Microsoftﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻳﺐ ) (http://www.microsoft.comﺛﻢ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ActiveSyncﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ. aﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ .ActiveSync aﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ. ﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻜﺒﻞ USBﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ LG ِ.GW550 ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻴﺒﻞ USBﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ USBﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ. ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ bﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎ. ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ،ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺑﻴﻊ ﻟﻤﻮﺍﻋﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺘﻬﺎ. ﺛﺒّﺖ ActiveSyncﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ .ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ،ActiveSyncﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ. ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ActiveSyncﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ Microsoft ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻳﺐ )(http://www.microsoft.com ﻭﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ .ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ActiveSync ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ،ﻳﺘﻌﺮﻑ ActiveSync ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﻭﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ. ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻣﻊ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ Exchange ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ .ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻌﺘﺰﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ،ﻓﺎﺣﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻭﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ Exchangeﻭﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻭﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺞ .Sync Setup Wizard ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ™Windows Vista ً ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ،ActiveSyncﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ™Windows Vistaﻣﺮﻛﺰ ™Microsoft Windows .Device Center Mobile ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ aﻳﻜﻮﻥ Windows Mobile Device Centerﻣﺜﺒًّﺘﺎ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ .Windows Vistaﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ Windows Mobile Device center ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺍً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ Windows ،Vistaﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ Microsoft ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻳﺐ )(http://www.microsoft.com ﻭﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ. ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ Windows Mobile ) Device Centerﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ (Windows ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ Windows ) Mobile Device Centerﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ (Windowsﻟﻠﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ،ﺳﻴُﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ Windows Mobile ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ .ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﻋﻼﻗﺔ. aﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ .ﻳﻘﻮﻡ Windows Mobile Device Centerﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﺛﻢ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ. aﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺧﻴﺺ ،ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ. aﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ Windows Mobile Device Centerﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ. 51 ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ™Windows Live ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ™ ،Windows Liveﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ. ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ™Windows Live .1ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء < ﺟﺪﻳﺪ. .2ﺣﺪﺩ .Windows Live .3ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ،ﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ. .4ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻢ. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ Windows Live™ Search .1ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < Windows .Live .2ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ )ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ( ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ. .3ﻳﻔﺘﺢ ﻣﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻭﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ. 50 ActiveSync ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ActiveSyncﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ .Outlookﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ActiveSyncﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺧﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ،Microsoft Exchangeﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﺨﺎﺩﻡ Microsoft Exchangeﻣﻊ .Exchange ActiveSync ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ،ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ActiveSyncﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭ/ﺃﻭ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ Exchangeﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﺪﻳﺜﺔ. ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ،ActiveSyncﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ: aﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ Outlookﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ. aﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ Outlookﻭﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭﻣﻮﺍﻋﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ Exchangeﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﺼﻠﻚ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺜﺎﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ. aﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ. ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ/ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ aﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ/ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺣﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻟﻸﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻭﻳﺐ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮﻫﺎ. ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ aﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻔﺢ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ .ﻭﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻧﻮﻉ ً )ﻣﺜﻼ GPRSﺃﻭ ActiveSyncﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ .(WiFiﻳُﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺸ ّﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ. ™Windows Live ﻣﻊ ™ Windows Liveﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒّﺖ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ،ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ،Hotmailﻭﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻳﺐ ﻭﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء. ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ™Windows Live .1ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < Windows .Live .2ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ .Windows Live .3ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ. ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! aﻟﺘﺠﻨّﺐ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﺳﻤﻚ ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭﻙ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻞ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺩﺧﻮﻟﻚ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ. .4ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ. .5ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺘﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ. .6ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻢ. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ Hotmail .1ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < Windows .Live .2ﺣﺪﺩ .Hotmail .3ﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ/ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ. 49 ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ Internet Explorer ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ Internet Explorerﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﻭﻳﺐ ﻭﺗﺼﻔﺢ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﺎً ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ. ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < Internet .Explorer ﻓﻲ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺯﻳﺎﺭﺗﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺎﺕ. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ. ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. aﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ :ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻌﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻳﺐ. aﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ :ﺣﺪﺩ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻭﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ. 48 aﺫﻫﺎﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﻳﺐ :ﺣﺪﺩ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺯﻳﺎﺭﺗﻪ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎً. aﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ :ﺣﺪﺩ ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ. aﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺎﺕ :ﺣﺪﺩ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺎﺕ ﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻭﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺯﻳﺎﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﺆﺧﺮﺍً. aﺗﻘﺪﻳﻢ :ﺣﺪﺩ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ. aﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ :ﺣﺪﺩ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻭﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ. aﻋﺮﺽ :ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ. • ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ :ﺣﺪﺩ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ ﻟﻠﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ. • ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ :ActiveXﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ .ActiveX • ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ :ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ. • ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ :ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ. aﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ :ﺣﺪﺩ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﻭﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ. aﻧﺴﺦ/ﻟﺼﻖ :ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﺼﻖ. aﺇﻧﻬﺎء :ﺣﺪﺩ ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ. ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ .3ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﻣﻌﻴّﻨﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً .ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻣﻌﻴّﻨﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً ،ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻔﺤﺺ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ .ﻳﺠﺮﻱ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ FMﺗﻔﺤﺼﺎً ﻟﻠﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ، ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﻣﺘﺪﺍﺧﻠﺔّ ،ﻧﻔﺬ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ: aﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ. aﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺤﺺ. ﻭﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ّ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺤﺺ. aﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ّ .4ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺇﻧﻬﺎء. ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ،FMﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﻱ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ: aﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﻋﺒﺮ :ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ. aﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ :ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴّﻨﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ. aﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ :ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ. aﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ /ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔ :ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻠﻪ. aﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ /ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ :AFﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﻳﻞ ) (AFﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻠﻪ. aﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ :ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻨﺒﻪ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ. 47 ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺒﺔ ،ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. aﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ :ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ. aﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺒﺔ :ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺒﺔ. aﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻵﻥ :ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻵﻥ. aﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺒﺔ :ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺒﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ. aﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺒﺔ :ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺒﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ. ّ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ aﻓﺘﺢ ﻣﻠﻒ :ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭﻟﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺒﺔ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ. aﻓﺘﺢ :URLﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ،ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ. aﺍﻟﺨﺼﺎﺋﺺ :ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ. ّ a ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ :ﻓﺘﺢ ﻣﺸ ّﻐﻞ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ .Windows 46 ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ FM ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ. ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ aﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺰﻭﻳﺪﻙ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ .FM .1ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ .FM .2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺣﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ. ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺣﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺎﺕ. ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻵﻥ .ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺟﺎﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺗﺎﻟﻴﺎً. ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻵﻥ ،ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. aﻣﺴﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻵﻥ :ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻵﻥ. aﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ :ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺗﻌﺠﺐ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ )ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ّ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻮﻓﺮﺕ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ(. aﺍﻟﺨﺼﺎﺋﺺ :ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ. ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺒﺔ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺒﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ .ﻭﻫﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺌﺎﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻵﻥ. aﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺒﺔ :ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺒﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ. aﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻟﻸﻋﻠﻰ/ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ :ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻸﻋﻠﻰ/ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ. aﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ :ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ. aﻣﺰﺝ /ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ :ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻴﺔ/ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ. aﺣﻔﻆ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ :ﺣﻔﻆ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ. 45 ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻲ ﻭﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ. ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ. ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ،ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. aﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ :ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ Windows ،Media Playerﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ. aﺍﻟﺨﺼﺎﺋﺺ :ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺟﺎﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً. aﺣﻮﻝ :ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ Windows Media ،Playerﻣﺜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ. ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ aﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺒﺔ :ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺒﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ. aﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ :ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎً. aﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ :ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ. aﻣﺰﺝ /ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ :ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻴﺔ/ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ. aﻣﻞء ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ :ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻞء ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ. 44 ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻭﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ/ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ. aﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎً ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ. aﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ/ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ. aﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ/ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ. aﻟﺮﻓﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻔﻀﻪ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻟﻸﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ. ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ .1ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ. .2ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ. .3ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ .ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ: aﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ. aﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ. aﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ. Windows Media ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ Microsoft Windows Media Player 10 Mobileﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﻴﺐ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ّ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ، ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﻭﻳﺐ ً ﻣﺜﻼ .ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ WAV :ﻭ WMAﻭ WMVﻭ MP3ﻭMIDI ﻭ SP-MIDIﻭ SMAFﻭ AACﻭ AMRﻭ 3GPﻭ MP4ﻭﻏﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ. ﻟﻔﺘﺢ Windows Media ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ Windows Mediaﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﻴﻦ: aﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < Windows Mediaﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ. aﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ. ﻳﺘﻀﻤّﻦ Windows Media Playerﺛﻼﺙ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ :ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺒﺔ .ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺒﺔ. 43 ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻛﻠﻴﺐ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ MMS ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻛﻠﻴﺐ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ. .1ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ً ﺃﻭﻻ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻼﻣﻬﺎ. .2ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ. .3ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻛﻠﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻪ. .4ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ،ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻟـ Outlookﺃﻭ (MMS ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ. .5ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ. .6ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮﻉ ،ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ. ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ. ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ aﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻛﻠﻴﺐ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ. 42 ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻛﺎﻥ. ّ .1ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ. .2ﺣﺪﺩ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺣﻔﻆ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء. .3ﺣﺪﺩ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ. ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ ﺁﺧﺮ .1ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ. .2ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ ﺁﺧﺮ. .3ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺣﻔﻆ < ﺣﻔﻆ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ. .4ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ،ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻢ. ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ aﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ :ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ. ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ. .1ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ. .2ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻛﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ. .3ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ. .4ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺸﻔﺎﻓﻴﺔ ،ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺷﻔﺎﻓﻴﺔ ،ﺃﻭ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻏﺒﺎﺷﺎً. .5ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻹﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ. ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ aﻟﻠﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ. aﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺃﺟﺮﻳﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻌﻢ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ. .5ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻢ. 41 ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻛﻠﻴﺐ aﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ، ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ. aﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ . ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ .1ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ. .2ﺣﺪﺩ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻛﻠﻴﺐ ،ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺣﺬﻑ. .3ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻌﻢ ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ. .1ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺎﺕ < ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻱ < ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺗﻲ < ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ .ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ،ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻛﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺼ ّﻐﺮﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ. ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ .2ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ Windows Media Playerﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤّﻦ. 40 ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺻﻬﺎ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻋﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻧﻬﺎ. .1ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ. .2ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ. .3ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ .ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ. .4ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،ﺛﻢ ّﻧﻔﺬ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ: aﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ :ﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ 90ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ. aﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ :ﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ .ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻭﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺘﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ .ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻢ ﻹﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ. ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻳﺠﻤّﻊ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻴﺐ ّ ﻭﻳﻨﻈﻤﻬﺎ ﻭﻳﻔﺮﺯﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ. ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻛﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ ،ﺃﻭ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻛﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ. ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻛﻠﻴﺐ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ. aﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ. ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ .1ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ .ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﻱ ﻛﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺼ ّﻐﺮﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ. ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! aﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﻱ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺎﺕ < ﺻﻮﺭﻱ. aﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺎﺕ < ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻱ ،ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ. .2ﺣﺪﺩ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﺮﺽ. ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ aﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ .ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺃﻧﺸﺄﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ. .3ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ/ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ/ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ،ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ/ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ )ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ / ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ /ﺍﺣﺘﻮﺍء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ /ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ(. 39 ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ. ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺣﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻟﻸﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ ﺛﻢ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ: aﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ :ﺣﺪﺩ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ .ﻫﺬﺍ ﻫﻮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ. aﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ :ﺣﺪﺩ ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ. aﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻼﺣﻘﺔ :ﺣﺪﺩ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻤﺲ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻠﺔ. aﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ :ﺣﺪﺩ ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ّ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً ﻭﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﻙ. :PMKaﺣﺪﺩ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺄﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺸﺮﻗﺔ. aﺍﻻﺑﺘﺴﺎﻣﺔ :ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺑﺘﺴﺎﻣﺔ. aﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ :ﺣﺪﺩ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ. aﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ :ﺣﺪﺩ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻺﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ. 38 ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺣﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ: aﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ :ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ. aﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ :ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ /ﻣﺘﻮﻫﺞ /ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ / ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ /ﻏﺎﺋﻢ aﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ :ﻋﺎﺩﻱ /ﺃﺳﻮﺩ ﻭﺃﺑﻴﺾ /ﺳﺎﻟﺐ /ﺑﻨﻲ ﺩﺍﻛﻦ aﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔّ : ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ. ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ .4ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﻱ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ: aﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ. aﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ. aﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﺒﺮ ،MMSﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ. aﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺣﺬﻑ. ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ .3ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ّ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ .ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ < ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ،ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ .ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ Windows .Media Player .4ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺇﻧﻬﺎء. ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ،ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ. ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻫﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ: ﺛﻮﺍﻥ aﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ :ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ )ٍ 5 ﺛﻮﺍﻥ(. ﻭٍ 10 aﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻠﺔ :ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﺧﺬﻫﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻼﺣﻘﺔ3) . ﺻﻮﺭ 5 ،ﺻﻮﺭ( aﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ :ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ. aﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ :ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻠﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ. aﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ :ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ. aﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ :ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻠﻪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ. aﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ :ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ 50) .ﻫﻴﺮﺗﺰ، 60ﻫﻴﺮﺗﺰ( aﻃﺎﺑﻊ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ :ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ. aﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ :ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ. )ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺟﺪﺍً( aﺑﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ :ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﻲ. )ﺃﻓﻘﻲ ،ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ( 37 ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ .1ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ. ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ/ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ. aﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺣﺬﻑ. .3ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﻱ .ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ. .4ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺇﻧﻬﺎء. ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ .1ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ. .2ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ < ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ. .3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ :ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ. 36 .2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ. .3ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ .ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﻱ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ: aﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ. aﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﻋﺮﺽ. aﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺒﺮ MMSﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ّ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻣﻚ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ: • ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻟـ Outlookﻭﺍﺳﺘﻼﻣﻪ ،ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻣﻊ Exchange Serverﻋﺒﺮ .ActiveSync • ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻟﻺﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻼﻣﻪ ،ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ . • ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ .ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻔﺎً ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ،ﻳﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ. ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﻳﺪﻳﺮ Windows Mobile 6.5 Standard ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ .ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﺩﺛﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺃﺭﺳﻠﺖ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺍﺑﻄﺔ .ﺃﻧﺸﺊ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌ ّﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﺩﺛﺔ .ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ. ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻓﺘﺤﻪ .ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ،ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﺩ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ. ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺎﺕ. aﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺬﻭﻓﺔ :ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺬﻭﻓﺔ. aﺍﻟﻤﺴﻮﺩﺍﺕ :ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ .ﺣﺪﺩ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ. aﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ :ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻤﺔ .ﺣﺪﺩ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ. aﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ :ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺘﻈﺮ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ .ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻓﺸﻞ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ. aﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺳﻠﺔ :ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺃﺭﺳﻠﺘﻬﺎ. 35 ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ aﺇﺫﺍ ﻧﺠﺢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ،ﺗﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﺒﺌﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﻭﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺧﺎﺩﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ. aﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻨﺠﺢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ،VPNﻓﺎﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ. .6ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ/ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ. .7ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻹﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ. ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ .1ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ. .2ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺟﺪﻳﺪ. .3ﻓﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﻠﻢ. ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! aﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻠﻤﻲ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﺨﻔﻴﺔ ﻭﻧﺴﺨﺔ، ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻟﻸﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺗﻤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ. .4ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮﻉ. .5ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺘﻚ. .6ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ. 34 ﻟﻠﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ .1ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺭﺩ/ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ < ﺭﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ. .2ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ. aﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺍﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﻧﺺ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ. aﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ < ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ. .3ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ. ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ aﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﻚ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ. aﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ. aﺇﺫﺍ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ SIMﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ،ﻓﺎﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ. aﺇﺫﺍ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ،ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ،ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ. ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ .6ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ. .7ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ. ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻟـ Outlook ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ®Microsoft Outlookﺃﻭ .®Exchange Server ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻟﻺﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻳﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻳﺐ ﻣﺜﻞ Hotmailﻭ Yahoo!Mailﻭﻏﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ. ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺭﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺭﺩ/ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ < ﺭﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ. ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻟـ Outlook ﻭﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻼﻣﻪ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ )(ISP ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ .VPN ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻄﺎﻋﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻼﻣﻬﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﺎً ﻛﻤﺎ ﻟﻮ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ .ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ: .1ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ. .2ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ. .3ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ. ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻟﻜﻲ ّ ﻳﺘﺬﻛﺮ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭﻙ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻟﻦ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ. .4ﻳﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻟﻦ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎً .ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ. .5ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻤﻚ )ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴُﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ( ﻭﺍﺳﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ )ﺍﺳﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ( ،ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ. 33 ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ aﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ. ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ﻭﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻭﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻭﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻼﻣﻬﺎ. ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ. ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! aﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ .ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ. aﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻤﻴﻦ. .4ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺘﻚ. ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! bﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻤﻮﺫﺝ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻲ ،ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻭﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ. .5ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ. ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ) MMSﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ( ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ) SMSﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ( .1ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ. .2ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺟﺪﻳﺪ < ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ. .3ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺿﻒ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺿﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﻠﻤﺎً ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء. 32 .1ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ. .2ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺟﺪﻳﺪ < .MMS .3ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺿﻒ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻢ. .4ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ. .5ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﻧﺺ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﺺ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ،ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ/ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻛﺎﺋﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ .ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ. ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻹﻓﺮﺍﻍ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺳﺠﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺣﺬﻑ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ. ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻔﻴﺔ aﺑﻼ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﺼﻔﻴﺔ :ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ،ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ. aﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ :ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ. aﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ :ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ. aﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺻﺎﺩﺭﺓ :ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻃﻠﺒﺘﻬﺎ. ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ .1ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. .2ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ. 31 ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ aﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺻﺎﺩﺭﺓ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ . ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺎً ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ،ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ. .1ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ .3G .2ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ: ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﺒﻞ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺛﺎﻟﺚ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺟﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ. ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ. ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ. ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ .3G ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺎً. ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﺠﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺋﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﻴﻦ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺳﺠﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ: aﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ،ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﺮﺽ. aﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺳﺠﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ. ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ، ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ. ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء. ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻭﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ. 30 .1ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. .2ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ. ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ،ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ. ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺘﺎﺕ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺃﺟﺮﻳﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺘﺎﺕ. aﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺘﺎﺕ. ﺣﺬﻑ .1ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ. .2ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺣﺬﻑ. .3ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻌﻢ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ. ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ِﻗﺒﻞ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻮﻓﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ .ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ،ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ. ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻪ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻜﻠﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻼﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﺩﺛﺔ. aﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﺩﺛﺔ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ .ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ. aﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ. ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ! ﻟﺘﺠﻨّﺐ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﺑﺴﻤﻌﻚ ،ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺎً ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻔﺎً ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ. ﻟﻜﺘﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ. ﻋﻨﺪ ﻛﺘﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ،ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﻟﻦ ّ ﻳﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﻚ aﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﺩﺛﺔ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﻛﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ .ﻳﻈﻬﺮ . ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ aﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﻢ. ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻭﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻫﻴﻦ ﺑﻴﻨﻚ ﻭﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻟﺪﻳﻪ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ. ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺕُﻋﺘﺒﺮ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ 3Gﺿﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ .ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺪء ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻣﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻪ ﻗﺪﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ .ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ،ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ. ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ .1ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺳﺠﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ. .2ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ. 29 ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ .1ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء. .2ﺣﺪﺩ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ. .3ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ. .4ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺑﻊ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ. .5ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻢ ﻟﻠﺤﻔﻆ. ّ ﻭﻳﺮﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﻠﻢ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ،ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ. ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ aﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ 1ﻋﺎﺩ ًﺓ ﻣﻌﻴًّﻨﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ،ﻭﺳﻴﻌﻴّﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ .ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً ،ﻓﺴﻴﺤﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ. aﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ،ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺣﺬﻑ. ﻟﻠﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻓﻀﻬﺎ aﻟﻠﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺭﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ . aﻟﺮﻓﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎء . aﻟﺮﻓﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ. ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ aﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺻﺎﺩﺭﺓ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ . ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ aﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ. aﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ. ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺟﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ .1ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﻣﺎ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻭﻃﻠﺐ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺁﺧﺮ؛ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﺤﺎﺩﺛﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ. .2ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ. 28 ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻳُﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺠﺮﺩ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ .ﺇﺫﺍ ﺿﻐﻄﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ،ﻓﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺳﺠﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﺪءﺍً ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﺘﻪ. ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻴﻨﺌ ٍﺬ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ. ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ،ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ . ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ” “0ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ +ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﻞ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻲ. . ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﺖ ﺭﻗﻤﺎً ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ،ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ .ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ . ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء .1ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء. .2ﺣﺪﺩ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ. .3ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ . ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺳﺠﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ .1ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺳﺠﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ . ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ .2ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. .3ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ . ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ .ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ،ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺍً ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء. 27 ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻃﺮﻕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﻭﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺘﻬﺎ .ﻓﻲ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ: .1ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء. .2ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎءّ ،ﻧﻔﺬ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ: aﻓﻲ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ،ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻷﺑﺠﺪﻱ. ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﺤﺴﺐ < ﺍﻻﺳﻢ. aﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ .ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ. aﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﻇﻔﻬﺎ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ﻣﻌﻴّﻨﺔ، ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﺤﺴﺐ < ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ .ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ. .1ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء. .2ﺣﺪﺩ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ. .3ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺣﺬﻑ. .4ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻌﻢ ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ. ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ .1ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء. .2ﺣﺪﺩ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ. .3ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ. .4ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻢ. 26 ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SIMﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ :SIM .1ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء. .2ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء < ﻋﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ. .3ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء < ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ .SIM ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ّ ﺗﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻨﻚ ﻭﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﺗﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻬﻢ .ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻭﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻝ ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ .ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺭﻧﻴﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ. ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻧﻮﻋﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء :ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺏ Outlookﻭﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ .SIM ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ Outlook ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ .ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ Outlookﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ،ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﺑﻴﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ. ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SIM ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ .SIMﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻭﺭﻗﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ. ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ .1ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء. .2ﺣﺪﺩ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ. .3ﺣﺪﺩ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ Outlookﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ،SIMﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ. .4ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻢ. ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! aﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺳﺠﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺣﻔﻆ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء. aﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺮﺳﻞ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ. ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻃﺮﻕ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺟﺪﺍً. .1ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء. .2ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ،ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﺤﺴﺐ < ﺍﻻﺳﻢ. .3ﻗﻢ ﺑﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ: aﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ .ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ .ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺪﺧﻠﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻀﻴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ. aﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺼﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ .ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء، ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻔﻴﺔ .ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻓﺌﺔ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء .ﻹﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﻻ ﻓﺌﺎﺕ. 25 ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ XT9 ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻊ ﻭﺿﻊ XT9ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﻳﻘﺘﺮﺡ ﺍﻹﻣﻼء ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﺘﺐ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ،ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ. ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ،XT9ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ + Fnﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ XT9ﺍﻹﻧﺠﻠﻴﺰﻳﺔ. ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ XT9 .1ﺍﻛﺘﺐ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ. .2ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ،ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻣﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻌﻬﺎ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﺘﺒﻬﺎ. .3ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ. ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﺎً ﻣﺜﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ .ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻄﻬﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ،ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ. ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ: ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﺑﺤﺮﻑ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﺑﺄﺣﺮﻑ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺑﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ 24 ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ )ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ( ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ. ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ .1ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ. .2ﺿﻊ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ. .3ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ. .4ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ. ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ .1ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < OneNote < Office Mobile .Mobile .2ﺃﻧﺸﺊ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻓﺘﺤﻬﺎ. .3ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ. .3ﺿﻊ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ. .3ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ. .4ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ. ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ aﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻄﺒﻮﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ Fnﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻖ. ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ Fnﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ. ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ Fnﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ .ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ. ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ. aﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ aﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺣﺮﻑ. ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ QWERTY Sym ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ DEL ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ: ﺗﺼﺤﺐ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ. ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ QWERTY ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ QWERTYﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﺺ ﺃﺑﺠﺪﻱ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺑﺎً .ﻭﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ. aﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ . ﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﺄﺣﺮﻑ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ .ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ. CAPS ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺑﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺑﺤﺮﻑ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﺑﺄﺣﺮﻑ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻛﻠﻪ ﺑﺄﺣﺮﻑ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ CAPS CAPS 23 ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ 22 ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻛﻤﺆﻗﺖ. Windows Live ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ™.Windows Live ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ. MSN Money ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ MSN Moneyﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ. MSN Weather ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻮﻗﻌﺎﺕ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﻘﺲ ﻋﺒﺮ .MSN Weather Search Widget ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ .Live Search ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ. ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ XT9 ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻣﻮﺱ ﻭﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﻭﺗﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ. ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ Marketplace ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻟﺸﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻳﺐ. Microsoft My Phone ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻣﻊ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ My Phone ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ .http://myphone.microsoft.com Adobe Reader LE ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ *.pdfﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ. ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ AGPS ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻢ. ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ. ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻭﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺷﺒﻜﺔ. ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ. ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ FM ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ .FM GPSExtra ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ .GPS Java ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ Javaﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ. ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ. Windows Media ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ .Windows Media Player ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ. ﻋﺎﺭﺽ RSS ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺧﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ RSSﺃﻭ .RDF 21 ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ 20 ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﻧﺼﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻼﻣﻬﺎ. ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﺟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻋﻴﺪ ﻭﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ. ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﻭﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ. Internet Explorer ﺗﺼﻔﺢ ﻭﻳﺐ ﻭﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ. ﻣﻬﺎﻡ ّ ﺗﻌﻘﺐ ﻣﻬﺎﻣﻚ. ActiveSync ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ. ﺳﺠﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺃﺟﺮﻳﺘﻬﺎ. ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻣﺜﺒّﺘﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ Bubble Breaker :ﻭ .Solitaire ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ. ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﻭﻓﺮﺯﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ. ﺑﺪء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﻜﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ. ّ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻛﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ. ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ. ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒّﺘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ. aﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ. ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء aﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺑﺪء ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺪء. aﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ،ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺣﺪﻳﺜﺔ. ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ. aﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ. aﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ . ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﺒّﺘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ. ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ Office Mobile Excel Mobile ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺼﻨﻔﺎﺕ Excelﻭﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ. Word Mobile ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ Wordﻭﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ. PowerPoint Mobile ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ. OneNote Mobile ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ. 19 ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺼﺮﺓ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺼﺮﺓ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻦ ﻛﻞ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ. ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ: ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ .ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ. ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﻭﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺣﺪﻳﺜﺔ .ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ. ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻋﻴﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺩﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻋﻴﺪ. ﺑﺪء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍً ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺗﻪ. ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻭﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ. ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ. aﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺮﺓ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ. aﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ،ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪء < ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ < ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ < ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ < ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻘﺔ. 18 ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺸﺎﻫﺪﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ. ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻘﻮﺓ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ GPRSﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ HSDPAﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺟﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﻓﻮﺿﺔ ﻻ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻧﺸﻂ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ) WCDMA (3Gﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺗﺠﺮﻱ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ HSDPAﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ) GPRSﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺑﺚ ﺍﻟﺮﺯﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ( ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ 3Gﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ 17 ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺟﺪﻭﻟﻚ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ،ﻭﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺇﻟﻘﺎء ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ. ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ Wi-Fi ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء )ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ( aﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ . ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء )ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ( aﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ. ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺼﺮﺓ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺼﺮﺓ. ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺳﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ّ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭﺍﺕ. ﻟﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ﻭﺻﻮﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻭﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻧﻬﺎ ﻭﻣﻬﻠﺘﻬﺎ. aﻟﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪء < ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ < ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ. 16 ﺑﺪء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ. ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ: • ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ. • ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ. ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻧﻮﻋﺎﻥ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ: aﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ :ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ. ﻹﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎء. ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ *. ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ: • ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻸﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺮﻓﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻔﻀﻪ. aﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ :ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﺩﺛﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻔﻴﺔ. ﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺑﺪء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺪء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ﺑﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯﻙ. ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺋﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﻴﻦ: aﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺼﺮﺓ ﺑﺪء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ،ﺛﻢ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻣﻌﻴّﻦ. aﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ < ﺑﺪء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ، ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ. ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ: • ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺣﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻸﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺮﻓﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻔﻀﻪ. 15 ﺑﺪء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ microSD .1ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ. .2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ microSD ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ. .3ﺍﻗﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ. ﺣﺮﻙ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ microSD ّ .4 ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ. .5ﺍﻗﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺩﻓﻌﻬﺎ ﻟﻺﻗﻔﺎﻝ. B A ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ! C ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ microSDﻫﻲ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻠﺤﻖ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻭﻫﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﻤّﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﻣﺔ .ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺒﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ. EN E aﺗﺠﻨّﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ microSD ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ. aﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣُﺼﻤﱠﻤﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺎﺣﺘﻮﺍﺋﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ. aﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺜﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ. aﻻ ﺗُﺪﺧﻞ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ .microSD D OP CK LO EN OP CK 14 LO ﺑﺪء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ! aﻻ ﺗُﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SIMﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ. aﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺑﺤﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ .ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻟﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨّﻌﺔ. aﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﺔ ﻭﻓﻖ ﺍﻷﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺗﻮﺍﺟﺪﻙ. aﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ USBﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺇﺫ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ. ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ microSD ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﻟﺘﺤﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ،ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ microSDﻓﻲ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ. ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ microSD .1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ microSD ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ) (Aﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﻗﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ).(B ﺣﺮﻙ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ microSDﻧﺤﻮ ّ .2 ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺒﻴﺔ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ّ ).(C .3ﺍﻗﻠﺐ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ) (Dﺛﻢ ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ) (Eﻟﻺﻗﻔﺎﻝ. ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ! • ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﻋﺪﻳﺔ ﺗﺠﻨﺒﺎً ﻟﻠﺼﻌﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻳﻖ. ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻤﻼﻣﺴﺔ ﺃﻳﺔ • ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ّ ﺃﺷﻴﺎء ﺣﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﻛﺎﻷﻇﺎﻓﺮ .ﻓﻘﺪ ّ ﻳﺸﻜﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ. 13 ﺑﺪء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ .1ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ).(A .2ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻟﻴﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ ).(B A B ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ... aﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺟﺎﺭ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ . aﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ،ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ . ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻔﺎً ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ... aﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻟﻠﺸﺤﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ. aﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ،ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻭﺗﺘﺤﻮّﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ. ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ .1ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺠﺮﺗﻬﺎ. ﺻﻞ ﻣﺤﻮّﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ) ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ( ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ِ .2 ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ. .3ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻣﻮﺻﻞ USBﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ. ﺑﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﺻﻞ ﻣﺤﻮّﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ) ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ( USB ّ ِ .4 ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ. 12 ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺸﺤﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻔﺮﻏﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ،ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻈﻬﻮﺭ. ﺑﺪء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SIM ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SIMﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻭﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺷﺘﺮﺍﻙ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ. ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SIM ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SIMﻣﻊ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ّ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺼﻮﺻﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ. ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺇﻋﻄﺎﺏ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SIMﻭﻣﻼﻣﺴﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺧﺪﺵ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺛﻨﻴﻬﺎ .ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺣﺬﺭﺍً ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ .ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﱠﺩﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ .SIM ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ .1ﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ. ﻣﻮﺻﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ .2ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ .ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ّ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺠﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ّ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ) (Aﺛﻢ ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ ).(B .3ﺃﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ. ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SIM B A .1ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ّ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ. ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺘﺤﺘﻬﺎ. ّ .2 11 ﺑﺪء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SIMﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺩﻭﻣﺎً ﻭﺍﻓﺼﻠﻪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻭﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SIMﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ microSDﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺗﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ. ﺗﺼﺤﺐ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺤﻦ. ﻟﻨﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ .1ﺿﻊ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﺑﻬﺎﻣﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ. ﻭﺣﺮﻙ .2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﻬﺎﻡ ّ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ. ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ .1ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ. .2ﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ. .3ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻤﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻠﻄﻒ ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ. B A 10 ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ GW550 ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ aﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ. aﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ. ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ. ﻣﻮﺻﻞ USB ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻴﺒﻞ USBﻟﻠﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ. ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻟﻠﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﺑﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ،ﺗﻘﺘﺮﺡ LGﺑﺄﻥ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ. ﻳُﺮﺟﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻴﺪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ .ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒّﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ. 9 ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ GW550 ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ .1ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ aﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻪ. aﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ .ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻗﻔﺎﻟﻬﺎ ،ﺃﻭ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺼﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ،ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ. .2ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ .3ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ .4ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ :ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ. .5ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ :ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ. .6ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ :ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ .ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ. .7ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ :ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ. .8ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ :ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ. .9ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ .10ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ .11ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ microSD .12ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ .13ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ :ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ. 8 .14ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ :ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻛﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻫﻴﺔ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ. .15ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ :ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ. .16ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎء :ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻓﻀﻬﺎ. .17ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ :ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ .ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺃﺣﺮﻑ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ؛ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ. .18ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ .19ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ :ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ .ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺮ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻼﻣﻬﺎ. .20ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ :ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ .ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ّ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ. .21ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ :ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ .ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ ّ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ. .22ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ :ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ. .23ﺣﺠﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ .24ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SIM ﻣﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ GW550 ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ .1ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ .12ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ .2ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ .13ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ .3ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ .14ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ .4ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ .15ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ .16ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎء .17ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ .5ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ .6ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ .7ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ .18ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ .19ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ .8ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ .9ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ .20ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ .21ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ .22ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ .10ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ OPEN .24ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SIM LOCK .23ﺣﺠﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ micro SD .11ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ microSD 7 ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺗﻬﺎﻧﻴﻨﺎ ﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﻚ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ GW550 Windows Mobileﻣﻦ .LG ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ .ﻳُﺮﺟﻰ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺃﺩﺍء ﻭﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺃﻱ ﺿﺮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻮء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ .ﺇﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺻﺮﺍﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﺘﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺑﻄﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻨﻮﺡ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﺍﺕ. 6 ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ76 ............................................... ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ 76 ..................................... ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ76 .............................................. ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً 76 .................... ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ ّ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ 76 ........................................ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ77 .................................................. ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ 77 ................................................ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ 78 ....................................... ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ 78 ........... ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ 78 ................... ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ78 .................................. ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ78 ......................................... ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ 79 ...................................... ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ79 ................................................. ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ79 ............................................... ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ79 .......................... 79 ...............................................Wi-Fi ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ81 ............................................... ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ 81 ............................................... ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ81 .................................................. ﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ 81 ......................................... ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ 82 .......................PIN ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ 82 ................................. ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻟﻚ82 ............................. ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ 82 ........................................... ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ82 ............................................. ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ82 ................................................. ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ83 ..................................... ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ83 ............................. ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤُﺪﺍﺭﺓ 83 ...................................... ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ84................................... ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻊ 84 ................................... ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻭ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ86.......... ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ 91........... 5 ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺮﺍﻛﺔ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ58 ....................................... ﻟﻘﺒﻮﻝ ﺷﺮﺍﻛﺔ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ59 ................................ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ59 ............................................... ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ60 .................................... ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ60 ..................................... ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺗﻲ60 ...................................... 61 ..................................... Office Mobile 61 ......................................Excel Mobile 63 ................................ OneNote Mobile 63 ............................ PowerPoint Mobile 64 ......................................Word Mobile 66 ..............................Adobe Reader LE ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻣﻠﻒ 66 .................................... PDF ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ66 ............................................. 66 ......................................MSN Money 66 ...................................MSN Weather 67 ..........................................GPSExtra ﺿﺒﻂ 67 ......................................... AGPS 67 .................................................. Java 67 ..................................... Marketplace 68 ........................Microsoft My Phone ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ 68 .............................. My Phone ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ68 .......................................... ﻋﺎﺭﺽ 68 ..........................................RSS ﻟﻼﺷﺘﺮﺍﻙ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺟﺰﺍﺕ ﻭﻳﺐ ﻟـ 68 .............RSS ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻣﻮﺟﺰﺍﺕ ﻭﻳﺐ ﻟـ 69 ...................RSS ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻮﺟﺰﺍﺕ ﻭﻳﺐ ﻟـ 69 ................... RSS 69 .........................Live Search Widget ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ69 ...................................... ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ70 .................................... 4 ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ 71 .................................................. ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ71 ............................ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ 71 .......... ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ 71 ................................................... ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﻬﻤﺔ 71 ......................................... ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﺔ 71 ................................ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﺬﻛﻴﺮ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻟﻜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ 72 ....... ﻹﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺨﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﺤﻘﺎﻕ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ 72 ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻣﻬﻤﺔ72 ................................... ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ 72 ................................................. ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ 73 .......................................... ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ 73 .................................................. ﻗﻮﺍﻣﻴﺲ 73 ......................................... XT9 ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ 73 ............................. XT9 ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ 73 .............................. XT9 ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ 74 ...............................XT9 ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ 74 .................... ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ 74 ..................... ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ 74 ..................... ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ 74 .......................................... XT9 ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ75.................................. ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ 75 .................................................. ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ75 .......................................... ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ 75 ...................................... ﺣﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ 75 ..................................... ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ 75 ............................. ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ75 ..................................... ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ76 ........................................ ﻣﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ76 ...................................... ّ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺣﺬﻑ30 ................................................. ﺣﺬﻑ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ31 ........................................... ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻔﻴﺔ 31 ....................................... ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ 31 ......................................... ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ32.................................... ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ 32 ................................................. ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ32 .................................. ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ32 ......................................... ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ) SMSﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ( 32 ............ ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ) MMSﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ( 32 .......... ﻟﻠﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ33 ........... ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ33 ....................................... ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ33 ....................... ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ 34 ..... ﻟﻠﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ 34 . ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ 35 ......................................... ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ35 ........................................... ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ36.......................... ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ36 .................................................. ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ 36 ........................................ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ 36 ......................................... ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ 37 .................................... ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ 38 ............................. ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ39 ................................. ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻛﻠﻴﺐ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ 39 ........... ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ 39 ...................................... ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ40 ............................ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ 40 .................. ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻛﻠﻴﺐ 40 ....................... ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ40 ........................................ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ 41 .................. ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻛﻠﻴﺐ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ 42 .............................. MMS ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء42 ........................... ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ ﺁﺧﺮ 42 ............................ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ 43 ........................ 43 ............................... Windows Media ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ44 ........................................ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻵﻥ45 .................................. ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺒﺔ 45 ........................................ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ 46 ..............................................FM ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ47 ........................... ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ 48.................................. 48 ............................. Internet Explorer ™49 ............................. Windows Live ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ™49 ..................... Windows Live ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ 49 ................................. Hotmail ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ™50 ....................Windows Live ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ 50 ....... Windows Live™ Search 50 .......................................ActiveSync ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ™51 .....................Windows Vista ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ 52 ......................Windows XP ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ53 ................................... ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ 55 ............................... ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ57 ....................................... ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ57 ............................................ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ 57 ............................... ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ً ﻗﺎﺑﻼ ﻟﻠﻜﺸﻒ 58 ......................... 3 ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ6........................................ ﻣﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ 7.........................GW550 ﺑﺪء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ10...................... ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SIMﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ 10 ........................ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ10 .............................................. ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ 11 ......................................... SIM ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ12 ....................................... ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ 13 .............. microSD ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻪ15 .................................. ﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ15 .................................... ﺑﺪء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ 15 ................................... ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ15 .................................. ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ16.......................... ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ16 ............................................. ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ 17 ........................................ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺼﺮﺓ 18 ...................................... ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء19 .............................................. ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ23.......................... ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ 23 ................................ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ 23 .........................QWERTY ﻭﺿﻊ 24 ............................................ XT9 ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ 24 ............................... ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ24 ......................................... ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء 25.................................... 2 ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء 25 ................................................. ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ 25 .............................Outlook ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ 25 ........................... SIM ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ25 ..................................... ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ 25 ................................ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء 26 ............................... ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ26 ........................... ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ 26 ..................................... ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء 26 .......................................... ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ27.................................... ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ 27 .................................. ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ 27 ........................... ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء 27 .......................... ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺳﺠﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ27 ............... ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ 27 ........................................ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ 28 .......................................... ﻟﻠﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻓﻀﻬﺎ 28 ........................ ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ 28 ........................................ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ 28 ................................. ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ28 .......................... ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺟﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ 28 .............................. ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻪ 29 ..................... ﻟﻜﺘﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ 29 .................................. ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ 29 ........................................ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ29 .................................. ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ30 .................................. ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ 30 .......................................... ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﺠﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ30 ............................ ﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ30 ............................... ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ 30 ................................. ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ30 .................................... ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺘﺎﺕ30 ..................................... GW550 ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺛﻴﻘﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ .LG GW550 Windows Mobile ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺛﻴﻘﺔ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ .LG Electronics ﻳُﺤﻈﺮ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺛﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ .LG Electronics
advertisement
* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project
Key Features
- 6.1 cm (2.4") 320 x 240 pixels TFT
- Bluetooth
- Single camera
- Lithium-Ion (Li-Ion) 1300 mAh